See in Reader
481 KiB
481 KiB
| 1 | Book | Chapter | Verse | ID | SupportReference | OrigQuote | Occurrence | GLQuote | OccurrenceNote |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 2CO | front | intro | ur4j | 0 | # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians\n\n1. Opening and thanksgiving (1:1–7)\n2. Trouble and boasting (1:8–14)\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n * Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15)\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * The true standard for boasting (10:1–18)\n * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15)\n * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33)\n * Paul’s ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:1–10)\n * Paul concludes his boasting (12:11–13)\n * Paul defends his financial conduct (12:14–18)\n * Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10)\n8. Closing (13:11–13)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?\n\nPaul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?\n\nIn 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.\n\nPaul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Corinth like?\n\nCorinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.\n\n### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?\n\nThese were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”\n* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)\n* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?\n\nPaul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?\n* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) | |||
| 3 | 2CO | 1 | intro | tsh3 | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special Concepts<br><br>### Paul’s integrity<br><br>People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.<br><br>### Comfort<br><br>Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical question<br><br>Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.<br><br>### Guarantee<br><br>Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) | |||
| 4 | 2CO | 1 | 1 | epd2 | 1 | General Information: | |||
| 5 | 2CO | 1 | 1 | mel3 | Παῦλος…τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ | 1 | Paul … to the church of God that is in Corinth | Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth” | |
| 6 | 2CO | 1 | 1 | f59u | Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς | 1 | Timothy our brother | The word **our** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew **Timothy** and considered him to be their spiritual **brother**. | |
| 7 | 2CO | 1 | 1 | mhg5 | translate-names | Ἀχαΐᾳ | 1 | Achaia | **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) |
| 8 | 2CO | 1 | 2 | f6k1 | χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη | 1 | May grace be to you and peace | This is a common greeting that Paul uses in his letters. | |
| 9 | 2CO | 1 | 3 | px2q | figs-activepassive | εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | May the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ be praised | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 10 | 2CO | 1 | 3 | k7dl | ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ | 1 | the God and Father | Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” | |
| 11 | 2CO | 1 | 3 | pg4a | figs-parallelism | ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως | 1 | the Father of mercies and the God of all comfort | These two phrases express the same idea in two different ways. Both phrases refer to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) |
| 12 | 2CO | 1 | 3 | blv4 | ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως | 1 | the Father of mercies and the God of all comfort | This could mean: (1) the words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) the words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**. | |
| 13 | 2CO | 1 | 4 | n2lc | figs-exclusive | παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν | 1 | comforts us in all our affliction | Here, **us** and **our** include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) |
| 14 | 2CO | 1 | 5 | nn5a | figs-metaphor | ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς | 1 | For just as the sufferings of Christ abound toward us | Paul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase in number. Alternate translation: “For just as Christ suffered greatly for our sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 15 | 2CO | 1 | 5 | i254 | τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | the sufferings of Christ | This could refer to: (1) the **sufferings** that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) the **sufferings** that Christ experienced on their behalf. | |
| 16 | 2CO | 1 | 5 | tg9w | figs-metaphor | περισσεύει…ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν | 2 | our comfort abounds | Paul speaks of **comfort** as if it were an object that could increase in size. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 17 | 2CO | 1 | 6 | y9bi | figs-exclusive | εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα | 1 | But if we are afflicted | Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) |
| 18 | 2CO | 1 | 6 | ylw2 | figs-activepassive | εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 19 | 2CO | 1 | 6 | wyj4 | figs-activepassive | εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα | 1 | if we are comforted | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 20 | 2CO | 1 | 6 | cfq7 | τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως, τῆς ἐνεργουμένης | 1 | your comfort that results | Alternate translation: “you experience effective comfort” | |
| 21 | 2CO | 1 | 8 | jqn8 | figs-doublenegatives | οὐ…θέλομεν ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν | 1 | we do not want you to be uninformed | If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … uninformed**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) |
| 22 | 2CO | 1 | 8 | pr8a | figs-metaphor | ὅτι καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐβαρήθημεν | 1 | We were so completely crushed beyond our strength | Paul and Timothy refer to their emotions of despair being like a heavy weight they have to carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 23 | 2CO | 1 | 8 | gu5b | figs-activepassive | ὑπερβολὴν…ἐβαρήθημεν | 1 | We were so completely crushed | The word **burdened** refers to the feeling of despair. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We were in complete despair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 24 | 2CO | 1 | 9 | lks3 | figs-metaphor | αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου ἐσχήκαμεν | 1 | we had the sentence of death on us | Paul and Timothy are comparing their feeling of despair to that of someone condemned to die. Alternate translation: “we were in despair like someone who is condemned to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 25 | 2CO | 1 | 9 | i7up | figs-ellipsis | ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | but in God | The words “be putting our trust” are left out of this phrase. Alternate translation: “but instead, be putting our trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 26 | 2CO | 1 | 9 | bu2y | figs-idiom | τῷ ἐγείροντι τοὺς νεκρούς | 1 | who raises the dead | Here to raise is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who causes the dead to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 27 | 2CO | 1 | 10 | x4kh | figs-metaphor | θανάτου | 1 | a deadly peril | Paul compares his feeling of despair as a result of the troubles that they experienced to a **deadly peril** or terrible danger. Alternate translation: “despair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 28 | 2CO | 1 | 10 | mwn9 | καὶ ἔτι ῥύσεται | 1 | he will continue to deliver us | Alternate translation: “he also will continue to rescue us” | |
| 29 | 2CO | 1 | 11 | q17d | συνυπουργούντων καὶ ὑμῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει | 1 | as you also join together … on our behalf | Alternate translation: “God will rescue us from danger as you, the people of the church of Corinth, also help us by praying with us” | |
| 30 | 2CO | 1 | 11 | k1fl | figs-activepassive | τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα | 1 | the gracious favor given to us | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the gracious favor which God has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 31 | 2CO | 1 | 12 | kqv3 | figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν…ἀνεστράφημεν | 1 | General Information: | In these verses Paul uses the words **our**, **we**, and **ourselves** to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who served with them. These words do not include the people he was writing to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) |
| 32 | 2CO | 1 | 12 | r9p8 | ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν | 1 | For our proud confidence is this | The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of feeling great satisfaction and joy in something. | |
| 33 | 2CO | 1 | 12 | c7mu | figs-personification | τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν | 1 | the testimony of our conscience | Paul speaks of not being guilty as if his **conscience** were a person that could testify. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) |
| 34 | 2CO | 1 | 12 | c1bd | figs-metonymy | οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν χάριτι Θεοῦ | 1 | not relying on fleshly wisdom but on the grace of God. | Here, **fleshly** represents human. Alternate translation: “We have not relied on human wisdom but on the grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 35 | 2CO | 1 | 13 | h21j | figs-doublenegatives | οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε | 1 | For we write no other things to you, but that which you read or also understand | If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **no … but**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you could read and understand everything we write to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) |
| 36 | 2CO | 1 | 14 | ma5m | καύχημα ὑμῶν | 1 | your reason for boasting | The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of feeling great satisfaction and joy in something. | |
| 37 | 2CO | 1 | 15 | k1u9 | 0 | Connecting Statement: | Paul explains his sincere expectation with pure motives to come see the believers in Corinth after his first letter. | ||
| 38 | 2CO | 1 | 15 | n5ex | ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει | 1 | with this confidence | The word **this** refers to Paul’s previous comments about the Corinthians. | |
| 39 | 2CO | 1 | 15 | y432 | δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε | 1 | you might have a second blessing | Alternate translation: “you might benefit from me visiting you twice” | |
| 40 | 2CO | 1 | 16 | mp6u | ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν | 1 | to be sent on my way to Judea by you | Alternate translation: “to assist me to continue on to Judea” | |
| 41 | 2CO | 1 | 17 | zms7 | figs-rquestion | μήτι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην? | 1 | I did not then take it lightly, did I? | Paul uses this question to emphasize he was sure about his decision to visit the Corinthians. The expected answer to the question is “no”. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I was not hesitating.” or “I was confident in my decision.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 42 | 2CO | 1 | 17 | chy9 | figs-rquestion | ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? | 1 | Do I plan things according to human standards … at the same time? | Paul uses this question to emphasize that his plans to visit the Corinthians were sincere. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to human standards, so that I would say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 43 | 2CO | 1 | 17 | fq3t | figs-explicit | ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? | 1 | This means that Paul did not say both that he would visit and that he would not visit at the same time. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to fleshly planning, so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ and ‘No, I will definitely not visit’ at the same time!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 44 | 2CO | 1 | 17 | y41z | figs-doublet | ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? | 1 | Do I plan things … so that I say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time? | The words **yes** and **no** are repeated for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) |
| 45 | 2CO | 1 | 19 | z4he | figs-explicit | ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ γὰρ Υἱὸς, Ἰησοῦς Χριστός…οὐκ ἐγένετο ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν. | 1 | For the Son of God … is not “Yes” and “No.” Instead, he is always “Yes.” | **Jesus** says “**Yes**” concerning the promises of God, which means that he guarantees that they are true. Alternate translation: “For the Son of God, Jesus Christ … does not say ‘Yes’ and ‘No’ concerning God’s promises. Instead, he always says ‘Yes.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 46 | 2CO | 1 | 19 | hd2t | guidelines-sonofgodprinciples | ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ…Υἱὸς | 1 | the Son of God | **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) |
| 47 | 2CO | 1 | 20 | h2xc | figs-explicit | ὅσαι…ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί | 1 | all the promises of God are “Yes” in him | This means that Jesus guarantees all of the **promises of God**. Alternate translation: “all the promises of God are guaranteed in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 48 | 2CO | 1 | 20 | h4uv | ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί…δι’ αὐτοῦ | 1 | “Yes” in him … through him we say | Both occurrences of the word **him** refer to Jesus Christ. | |
| 49 | 2CO | 1 | 21 | d3s3 | ὁ δὲ βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς σὺν ὑμῖν εἰς Χριστὸν καὶ χρίσας ἡμᾶς Θεός | 1 | Now God is the one who establishes us with you | This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that **God** confirms the relationship of him and his team with each other because they are **in Christ**. (2) Paul is saying that **God** confirms the relationship of him and his team, and the Corinthians, with **Christ**. | |
| 50 | 2CO | 1 | 21 | tjc6 | χρίσας ἡμᾶς | 1 | he anointed us | This could mean: (1) he sent us to preach the gospel. (2) he chose us to be his people. | |
| 51 | 2CO | 1 | 22 | z43l | figs-metaphor | ὁ καὶ σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς | 1 | the one who also sealed us | Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a mark on us as a sign that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “he has put his mark of ownership on us” or “he has shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 52 | 2CO | 1 | 22 | xe98 | figs-metonymy | δοὺς τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν | 1 | he gave us the pledge of the Spirit in our hearts | Here the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Alternate translation: “gave us the Spirit to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 53 | 2CO | 1 | 22 | jcv7 | figs-metaphor | τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | the pledge of the Spirit | The **Spirit** is spoken of as if he was a partial downpayment toward eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 54 | 2CO | 1 | 23 | j8lc | ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν | 1 | Now I call God as a witness to my soul | Here, to be **a witness** refers to a person telling what they have seen or heard in order to settle an argument. Alternate translation: “I ask God to show what I say is true” | |
| 55 | 2CO | 1 | 23 | j15t | ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν | 1 | so that I might spare you | Alternate translation: “so that I might not cause you more suffering” | |
| 56 | 2CO | 1 | 24 | cyu4 | συνεργοί ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν | 1 | we are fellow workers with you for your joy | Alternate translation: “we are working with you so that you may have joy” | |
| 57 | 2CO | 1 | 24 | cih8 | figs-idiom | τῇ…πίστει ἑστήκατε | 1 | you stand firm in the faith | Here, **stand firm** can refer to something that does not change. Alternate translation: “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 58 | 2CO | 2 | intro | hy3h | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians. \n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone inside. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside. \n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has properly been disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and those with him are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just like that, he and those with him spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Paul’s travel\n\nIn [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]]) | |||
| 59 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | wh9c | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [1:23](../01/23.md) about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to “spare” them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) |
| 60 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | wpd4 | writing-pronouns | ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ | 1 | Here, the word **this** refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: **not to come to you again in sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use **this**. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 61 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | yz5q | figs-idiom | ἐμαυτῷ | 1 | Here the phrase **for myself** indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 62 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | yrbk | figs-go | τὸ μὴ…ἐλθεῖν | 1 | Here the word **come** refers to traveling from somewhere else to Corinth to visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “not to travel” or “not to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 63 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | ma6n | figs-explicit | πάλιν | 1 | Here, the word **again** implies that Paul has already visited the Corinthians **in sorrow**. He does not give many details about this visit. It cannot be the first time that he visited the Corinthians, so he must have visited them again **in sorrow** sometimes between when he first met them and when he wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “yet again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 64 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | hu8y | figs-explicit | ἐν λύπῃ | 1 | Here the ones who experience the **sorrow** could be: (1) Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for all of us” (2) just the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 65 | 2CO | 2 | 1 | ij73 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν λύπῃ | 1 | in sorrow | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “in a sorrowful way” or “in a way that makes us sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 66 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | jb50 | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul is avoiding the “sorrow” he mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I decided that because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 67 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | q4aq | grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἰ…ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here Paul refers to a situation that has not happened and which he intends to keep from happening. He refers to the situation using the conditional form to indicate what would result from the situation if it did happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to something that may not happen but that the author wishes to speak about. Alternate translation: “supposing that I myself grieved you” or “were I myself to grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 68 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | le34 | figs-rpronouns | ἐγὼ λυπῶ | 1 | Here, the word **myself** emphasizes **I**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **I** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is I myself who grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])\n\n\n\n | |
| 69 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | nb6x | figs-rquestion | καὶ τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ? | 1 | If I caused you pain, who could cheer me up but the very one who was hurt by me? | Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there is no one else.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then there is no one cheering me up, except the one being grieved by me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 70 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | mbbo | figs-genericnoun | τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος | 1 | Here the author uses the singular form **the one** to refer in general to people, particularly to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers in general to people. Alternate translation: “who are those cheering me up, except those being grieved” or “who are those cheering me up, except you who are being grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) | |
| 71 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | mbag | grammar-connect-exceptions | τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ | 1 | If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this question to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is it not the one being grieved by me who is the only one cheering me up” or “is there any one cheering me up besides the one being grieved by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) | |
| 72 | 2CO | 2 | 2 | x2vr | figs-activepassive | ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ | 1 | the very one who was hurt by me | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I have grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 73 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | kxu2 | figs-explicit | ἔγραψα | 1 | I wrote this same thing | Here Paul refers to a letter he had already written to the Corinthians. Most likely, he wrote this letter sometime between 1 Corinthians and 2 Corinthians, but we do not have the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that Paul is referring to a letter that he already sent to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my last letter” or “I sent you the previous letter that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 74 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | e7c4 | writing-pronouns | τοῦτο αὐτὸ | 1 | Here, the phrase **this same {thing}** refers to what Paul wrote in the previous letter. He could referring to: (1) what he just wrote in [2:1–2](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “the same thing I am now writing” (2) the contents of the previous letter in general. Alternate translation: “those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 75 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | abty | grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | ἐλθὼν | 1 | Here, the phrase **having come** refers to something that an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same as **I might not have sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) | |
| 76 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | l9t0 | figs-go | ἐλθὼν | 1 | Here, the word **come** refers to Paul’s plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to traveling to visit someone. Alternate translation: “having arrived” or “having come to visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 77 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | v87i | figs-abstractnouns | μὴ…λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’ | 1 | I might not be hurt by those who should have made me rejoice | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “I might not become sorrowful because of” or “I might not be sad because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 78 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | owzn | ἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν | 1 | Here, this clause could indicate that **it is necessary** for: (1) Paul to **rejoice** in the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “from those in which it is necessary for me to rejoice” (2) the Corinthians to give “joy” to Paul. Alternate translation: “from those for whom it is necessary to give me joy” | ||
| 79 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | p4q2 | grammar-connect-logic-result | πεποιθὼς | 1 | Here, the phrase **having confidence** introduces a reason why Paul **wrote** the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because I had confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 80 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | b6f9 | figs-abstractnouns | πεποιθὼς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 81 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | i5r6 | ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν | 1 | my joy is the same joy you all have | Here Paul could be stating that his **joy**: (1) leads to the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy leads to your joy” (2) has the same source as the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “what gives me joy is what gives you joy” (3) comes from the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy comes from your joy” | |
| 82 | 2CO | 2 | 3 | gmyo | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I am joyful and so you are joyful” or “I rejoice and so you rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 83 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | p4n6 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation about the letter that Paul **wrote** to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 84 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | tl4m | figs-explicit | ἔγραψα | 1 | Here, the phrase **I wrote** again refers to the previous letter. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 85 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | uch7 | figs-idiom | ἐκ…ἔγραψα ὑμῖν | 1 | from great affliction | Here Paul refers to “writing” **out of** something else. In his culture, this form referred to what the person was experiencing while they **wrote**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what an author experiences while they are writing something. Alternate translation: “I wrote to you as I experienced” or “I wrote to you while I felt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 86 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | oz8a | figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ…πολλῆς θλίψεως καὶ συνοχῆς καρδίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **tribulation** and **anguish**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “suffer” and “distress.” Alternate translation: “as I suffered much and was distressed in my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 87 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | vs7m | figs-metonymy | συνοχῆς καρδίας | 1 | with anguish of heart | In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “anguish of mind” or “emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 88 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | d5vf | figs-idiom | διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων | 1 | with many tears | Here, the phrase **through many tears** indicates what Paul was doing while he **wrote** the letter. The word **tears** refers to the act of crying or weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that a person is crying or weeping while they are doing something. Alternate translation: “with much crying” or “as I shed many tears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 89 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | y0t3 | figs-infostructure | οὐχ ἵνα λυπηθῆτε, ἀλλὰ τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε, ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς | 1 | If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “so that you might know the love that I have more abundantly for you, not so that you would be grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 90 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | uc77 | figs-activepassive | λυπηθῆτε | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, the Paul implies that “he himself” would do it. Alternate translation: “I would grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 91 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | g826 | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν ἀγάπην…ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “how abundantly I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 92 | 2CO | 2 | 4 | zw13 | περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here, the phrase **more abundantly** could indicate that: (1) Paul has “abundant” love for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “most abundantly for you” or “very abundantly for you” (2) Paul loves the Corinthians more than he loves other people. Alternate translation: “more abundantly for you than I have for others” | ||
| 93 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | xomm | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δέ | 1 | Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul did not want to “grieve” them. Here he addresses how someone has **caused grief**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 94 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | xlxc | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ…τις λελύπηκεν, οὐκ…λελύπηκεν | 1 | Here Paul is speaking as if someone causing **grief** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that someone has indeed **caused grief**. Alternate translation: “the person who caused grief has not grieved only” or “if anyone has caused grief, and it has happened, he has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 95 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | ln83 | figs-abstractnouns | λελύπηκεν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “grieve.” Alternate translation: “has grieved people” or “has caused others to grieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 96 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | j6bn | figs-gendernotations | οὐκ…λελύπηκεν | 1 | Here, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has **grieved** others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 97 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | d7fx | figs-explicit | οὐκ ἐμὲ λελύπηκεν | 1 | Here Paul could be indicating that the person has: (1) **grieved** Paul some, but mostly the person has **grieved** the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me much” (2) not **grieved** Paul at all but only the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 98 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | rvpt | figs-idiom | ἀπὸ μέρους | 1 | Here, the phrase **in part** indicates that only some of an action or group is involved. In this case, Paul could be using **in part** to refer to: (1) how many of the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “some of you” or “part of your group” (2) how much the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “he has partially grieved you” or “you also in part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 99 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | iva7 | figs-infostructure | ἀπὸ μέρους, ἵνα μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ πάντας ὑμᾶς | 1 | There are several ways to understood how the pieces of the sentence go together. You could translate the sentence so that: (1) **in order that I might not burden all of you** indicates the reason why Paul uses the phrase **in part**, which would refer to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “you in part, which I say so that I might not burden all of you” (2) **in part** and **all of you** go together, and **in order that I might not burden** is a parenthetical statement explaining why Paul says **in part**. Alternate translation: “in part—which I say so that I might not burden—all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 100 | 2CO | 2 | 5 | or46 | figs-metaphor | μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ | 1 | Here, to **burden** someone refers to placing a heavy object on someone’s back. Paul could be using the phrase **I might not burden** to refer to: (1) how he is trying to avoid saying too much about the situation. In other words, Paul uses the phrase **in part** because he does not want to make his words too strong, which would make the words like a person carrying a heaven load. Alternate translation: “I might not say too much about” or “I might not exaggerate about” (2) how he wants to avoid troubling or distressing all of them, which would be like “burdening” them with a heavy object. Alternate translation: “I might not distress” or “I might not trouble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 101 | 2CO | 2 | 6 | wr3k | figs-abstractnouns | τῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **punishment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “punish.” Alternate translation: “How such a person has been punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 102 | 2CO | 2 | 6 | iy4r | figs-extrainfo | ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη | 1 | This punishment of that person by the majority is enough | Here, the word **This** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew what the **punishment** was. However, Paul never states exactly what the punishment was. You should use a word or phrase that is as general as what Paul used. Alternate translation: “That punishment” or “The punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) |
| 103 | 2CO | 2 | 6 | g3eo | writing-pronouns | τῷ τοιούτῳ | 1 | Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he mentioned in the previous verse, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the person we are talking about” or “on that individual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 104 | 2CO | 2 | 6 | z2dt | translate-unknown | τῶν πλειόνων | 1 | Here, the word **majority** refers to more than half of a group. Often it means most of the group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to “most” of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “almost all of you” or “the majority of your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 105 | 2CO | 2 | 6 | d7b7 | figs-extrainfo | τῶν πλειόνων | 1 | Here the phrase **the majority** implies a “minority.” These are some of the Corinthians who either did not agree with the **punishment** or who thought that the person had done nothing wrong. Paul does not give any information about this “minority,” however, so you should use a word or phrase that refers to most of the people in a group. Alternate translation: “all but a few of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 106 | 2CO | 2 | 6 | a7c4 | figs-explicit | ἱκανὸν | 1 | is enough | Here, the word **sufficient** could indicate that the **punishment**: (1) has been severe enough. Alternate translation: “is severe enough” or “is sufficiently strong” (2) has lasted long enough. Alternate translation: “has lasted long enough” or “can end now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 107 | 2CO | 2 | 7 | we1i | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | τοὐναντίον μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς χαρίσασθαι | 1 | Here, the words **on the contrary** and **rather** indicate that Paul wishes the Corinthians to do now the opposite of what they were doing. Instead of “punishing” the person, Paul wants them now to **forgive and comfort** the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that naturally indicate such a change in behavior. Alternate translation: “in contrast, you should instead forgive” or “instead of doing that, you should change your behavior and forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 108 | 2CO | 2 | 7 | w4n6 | figs-gendernotations | παρακαλέσαι…τῇ | 1 | Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “comfort the individual … any” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 109 | 2CO | 2 | 7 | vpx1 | figs-activepassive | μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος | 1 | he is not overwhelmed by too much sorrow | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that excessive sorrow might not overwhelm such a person” or “so that such a person might not experience overwhelming and excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 110 | 2CO | 2 | 7 | i3dm | figs-metaphor | μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if a person could be **overwhelmed** or swallowed up by **sorrow**. He speaks in this way to indicate that a person can experience so much **sorrow** that it controls and destroys them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that such a person might not be overcome by excessive sorrow” or “so that such a person might not despair because of his excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 111 | 2CO | 2 | 7 | me4y | writing-pronouns | ὁ τοιοῦτος | 1 | Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he has already mentioned, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. See how the translated this phrase in [2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “the person we are talking about” or “that individual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 112 | 2CO | 2 | 7 | cgil | figs-abstractnouns | τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “as he is excessively sorrowful” or “because he is excessively sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 113 | 2CO | 2 | 8 | r916 | grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **So** introduces an exhortation that is based on what Paul said in the previous verse about “forgiving” and “comforting” the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 114 | 2CO | 2 | 8 | ii0x | figs-infostructure | κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην | 1 | Here, the phrase **for him** could go with: (1) **love**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm the love that you have for him” (2) **reaffirm**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm to him your love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 115 | 2CO | 2 | 8 | yi2z | figs-abstractnouns | εἰς…ἀγάπην | 1 | publicly affirm your love for him | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “that you love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 116 | 2CO | 2 | 8 | vlmy | figs-gendernotations | αὐτὸν | 1 | Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), [7](../02/07.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual” or “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n | |
| 117 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | oadd | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **Indeed** introduces more information about the letter that Paul wrote to them (see [2:3–4](../02/03.md)). It does not identify a close link with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **Indeed** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “As a matter of fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 118 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | lc78 | figs-explicit | καὶ ἔγραψα | 1 | Here, the phrase **I also wrote** again refers to the letter that Paul sent to them before he wrote 2 Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3–4](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I also wrote that letter” or “I also sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 119 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | pp4j | figs-doublet | εἰς τοῦτο…ἵνα | 1 | Here, the phrases **for this reason** and **so that** both introduce the purpose for which Paul **wrote** the previous letter. Paul uses this repetition to emphasize his purpose. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, and if it would not emphasize the purpose, you could combine the two phrases and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so that” or “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) | |
| 120 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | eebj | translate-unknown | τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν | 1 | Here, the word **proof** refers primarily to the results of a test or trial. In this case, Paul is saying that he wants to **know** how they passed the test, which were the commands he included in the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the results of a test. Alternate translation: “how you responded to my commands” or “your character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 121 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | uzsx | figs-possession | τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **proof** that the Corinthians give or provide. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the prove you provide” or “the proof from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 122 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | gs2t | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **proof**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prove.” Alternate translation: “what you would prove to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 123 | 2CO | 2 | 9 | xw5t | figs-explicit | ὑπήκοοί | 1 | you are obedient in everything | Here, Paul does not state to whom they are **obedient**. He could be implying that they are **obedient** to: (1) him as an apostle. Alternate translation: “obedient to me” (2) God and God’s commands. Alternate translation: “obedient to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 124 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | r7ib | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δέ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in Paul’s argument. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development or a conclusion, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Finally,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 125 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | o14x | figs-explicit | ᾧ…τι χαρίζεσθε, κἀγώ | 1 | Here Paul could be making: (1) a specific statement about forgiving the person who “grieved” the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “to that person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (2) a general concluding statement about forgiveness. Alternate translation: “to any person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 126 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | uzvm | figs-ellipsis | κἀγώ | 1 | This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “I also forgive it” or “I also forgive them for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 127 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | tzn1 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ γὰρ | 1 | Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous clause (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “further,” or “and in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 128 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | d9ah | figs-infostructure | καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ὃ κεχάρισμαι, εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι, δι’ ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here Paul includes the comment **if I have forgiven anything** in the middle of his sentence. Consider what may be a natural place to include extra information like this. Alternate translation: “for indeed, if I have forgiven anything, what I have forgiven is for your sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 129 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | avqv | figs-explicit | εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι | 1 | This clarification fits with what Paul said in [2:5](../02/05.md) about how the person did not “grieve” him but rather the Corinthians. Much like there, Paul could be saying that: (1) he does not have very much to forgive, since the person only hurt him a little. Alternate translation: “what little I had to forgive” (2) he really has nothing to forgive, since the person hurt the Corinthians, not him. Alternate translation: “although there was nothing to forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 130 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | cbm6 | δι’ ὑμᾶς | 1 | forgiven for your sake | Here, the phrase **for your sake** could mean that: (1) Paul forgives the person to benefit or help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “is for your benefit” (2) Paul forgives the person because the Corinthians forgave him. Alternate translation: “is because of you” or “is because you forgave” | |
| 131 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | b6uy | figs-explicit | ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here, the phrase **in {the} presence of Christ** could indicate that: (1) Paul forgives because he knows that **Christ** sees or knows what he does. So, he acts in a way that pleases **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christ desires” or “with Christ watching” (2) Paul forgives with **Christ** as witness. Alternate translation: “with Christ as witness” or “with Christ guaranteeing it” (3) Paul forgives as someone who represents **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as one who represents Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 132 | 2CO | 2 | 10 | nq4n | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **presence**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to being close to or in front of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in front of Christ” or “before Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 133 | 2CO | 2 | 11 | xaoc | grammar-connect-words-phrases | ἵνα | 1 | Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and Corinthians should “forgive” others (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 134 | 2CO | 2 | 11 | xoaw | figs-activepassive | μὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan would not take advantage of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 135 | 2CO | 2 | 11 | x3p2 | translate-unknown | μὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν | 1 | Here, the phrase **taken advantage of** refers to when someone gains power or control over someone else, usually by using some area in which that person is weak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how someone gains power or control over someone else. Alternate translation: “we would not be exploited” or “we would not be dominated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 136 | 2CO | 2 | 11 | z6no | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the first half of verse about **Satan**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “because” or “inasmuch as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 137 | 2CO | 2 | 11 | m46t | figs-litotes | οὐ…αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν | 1 | For we are not ignorant of his plans | Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “we are fully aware of his schemes” or “we are very knowledgeable about his schemes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) |
| 138 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | nh7u | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section. Paul has finished speaking about the person that he and the Corinthians should forgive. He now returns to the topic of his travel plans and why he has not visited the Corinthians (see [1:8–23](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” or “I wish to speak again about my journeys:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 139 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | l6vd | figs-go | ἐλθὼν…εἰς | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the phrase **having come to** refers to arriving in one place or city from another, in this case probably traveling on land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “having traveled to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) |
| 140 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | c14o | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας…ἀνεῳγμένης | 1 | This clause gives information that contrasts with what Paul will say in the previous verse about how he left **Troas**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this contrast with a natural form. Alternate translation: “and although a door for the gospel of Christ had been opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 141 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | a1ti | figs-metaphor | εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης | 1 | a door for the gospel of Christ was opened to me in the Lord | Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for him to preach the **gospel** as if God were “opening” a **door** for the **Gospel**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul can go in and preach the message about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “and an opportunity to preach the gospel of Christ having been given to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 142 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | n9cr | figs-activepassive | εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. In this case, Paul could be stating the the **Lord** did it, or he could be implying that “God” did it **in {the} Lord**. See the note about **in {the} Lord**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me” or “and God having opened a door for the Gospel of Christ for me in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 143 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | vtg5 | figs-possession | τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that could: (1) be about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel concerning Christ” (2) belong to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christ’s gospel” or “the gospel from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 144 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | fcf7 | figs-metaphor | ἐν Κυρίῳ | 1 | Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in {the} Lord** to describe his union with Christ. In this case, being **in {the} Lord**, or united to the Lord, shows that the **door** was **opened** to Paul: (1) by the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “by the Lord” (2) so that he could continue to serve in his union with the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “in my union with the Lord” or “so that I can do what the Lord wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 145 | 2CO | 2 | 12 | m7x6 | figs-explicit | Κυρίῳ | 1 | Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord, the Messiah” (2) God generally. Alternate translation: “the Lord God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 146 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | rjy9 | figs-idiom | οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου | 1 | I had no relief in my spirit | Here, the clause **I had no relief in my spirit** indicates that Paul was anxious or concerned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form or plain language. Alternate translation: “my mind could not rest” or “I was concerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 147 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | k7k9 | figs-explicit | οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου | 1 | Here Paul does not clarify what he was concerned or anxious about. He clarifies later in [7:5–16](../07/05.md) that he was anxious to know how Titus’ visit to the Corinthians went. The Corinthians would have made this inference, since Titus had already visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “I had no relief in my spirit about Titus’ visit to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 148 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | trp2 | figs-abstractnouns | οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “restful” or “relieved.” Alternate translation: “my spirit was not restful” or “my spirit was not relieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 149 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | w79i | figs-explicit | μὴ εὑρεῖν με Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου | 1 | Here Paul is stating that **Titus** was not in Troas, not that he simply could not find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that shows that **Titus** was not in the city of Troas when Paul visited there. Alternate translation: “as I found out that my brother Titus was not there” or “as my brother Titus was not in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 150 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | xd5h | figs-metaphor | Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου | 1 | my brother Titus | Here Paul speaks of **Titus** as if he were his **brother** (probably a younger **brother**). He speaks in this way to indicate that **Titus** is a fellow believer and that he and Paul are as close as if they they were brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “Titus, who is like my own brother,” or “my very dear friend and fellow believer Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 151 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | wq6j | figs-explicit | ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς | 1 | So I left them | Here Paul refers to how he **said farewell** to the people from Troas, but he also means that he left their city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having said farewell to them and departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 152 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | j9je | writing-pronouns | αὐτοῖς | 1 | Here, the word **them** refers to the friends that Paul made in the city of “Troas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)). Most likely, these people were fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom **them** refers more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the people from Troas” or “to my friends in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 153 | 2CO | 2 | 13 | gxp2 | figs-go | ἐξῆλθον εἰς | 1 | Here, the phrase **went on to** refers to travel in which a person leaves one area and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “I departed from there to go to” or “I went from there to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) | |
| 154 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | s6k3 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul will not speak again about Titus and his travel plans until [7:5](../07/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 155 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | g39s | figs-idiom | τῷ…Θεῷ χάρις | 1 | Here, the phrase **thanks {be} to God** is a way to indicate that one is praising God for something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a normal way in your language to thank or praise someone for what that person has done. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 156 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | qgok | figs-exclusive | ἡμᾶς…ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach … us” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 157 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | gpd2 | figs-metaphor | τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς | 1 | God, who in Christ always leads us in triumph | Here Paul speaks as if **God** were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or **triumphal procession** to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and those with him could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 158 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | so2k | figs-metaphor | ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ | 1 | Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why or how they are involved in the **triumphal procession**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that union with Christ is the reason or the means for participating in the **procession**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with Christ” or “by means of our union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 159 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | l1nr | figs-exmetaphor | τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ | 1 | Through us he spreads the sweet aroma of the knowledge of him everywhere | Here Paul speaks as if **the knowledge of him** were an **aroma**, a smell or odor. In this case, the context implies that this is a pleasing or good smell. He speaks in this way to indicate that everyone hears and reacts to the message about Christ, just like everyone smells and reacts to a strong odor. Also, just like a smell fills a whole room, so the good news fills **every place** on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Consider using a form that you can continue to use in the following two verse, in which Paul continues the **aroma** metaphor. Alternate translation: “making known through us and in every place the knowledge of him, which is like an good smell” or “powerfully revealing through us the knowledge of him, which is spreading into every place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 160 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | tlqe | figs-possession | τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **aroma** that is **knowledge**. In other words, the possessive indicates what the **aroma** stands for. Then, Paul indicates that this **knowledge** is about **him**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the aroma, which is knowledge about him” or “the aroma, that is, knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 161 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | ihbw | figs-abstractnouns | τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “that is knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 162 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | lxlc | writing-pronouns | αὐτοῦ | 1 | Here, the word **him** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “of God” (2) Christ specifically. Alternate translation: “of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 163 | 2CO | 2 | 14 | eq21 | figs-hyperbole | ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ | 1 | he spreads … everywhere | Here Paul speaks as if God used him and those with him to make God known **in every place**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) |
| 164 | 2CO | 2 | 15 | cjjj | grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὅτι | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about “the aroma” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Here is what I mean:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 165 | 2CO | 2 | 15 | yfx6 | figs-exclusive | ἐσμὲν | 1 | Here, just as in [2:14](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 166 | 2CO | 2 | 15 | x6nn | figs-exmetaphor | Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | we are to God the sweet aroma of Christ | Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, he identifies himself and those with him as a **fragrance** that comes from **Christ** and which goes toward **God**. By speaking in this way, he shows that **we** are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and those with him and realizes that they represent **Christ** before **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 167 | 2CO | 2 | 15 | b1k1 | figs-possession | Χριστοῦ εὐωδία | 1 | the sweet aroma of Christ | Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **fragrance** could: (1) come or spread from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance from Christ” (2) be presented or offered by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance that Christ presents” or “a fragrance that Christ offers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 168 | 2CO | 2 | 15 | itc8 | figs-activepassive | τοῖς σῳζομένοις | 1 | those who are saved | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 169 | 2CO | 2 | 15 | ze7n | figs-extrainfo | τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις | 1 | Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the **perishing**. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 170 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | zrae | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | οἷς μὲν…οἷς δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first of two parts. The word **but** introduces the second part. The author uses this form to contrast “the ones perishing” and “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “on one hand, to the ones … but on the other hand, to the others” or “to the ones … but to the others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 171 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | pv6o | figs-infostructure | οἷς μὲν ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον, οἷς δὲ ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν | 1 | Here Paul refers to “the ones perishing” before he refers to “the ones being saved,” which is the opposite of the order he used in [2:15](../02/15.md). This was good style in his culture. If reversing the order from [2:15](../02/15.md) would be confusing for your readers, and if it would not be good style, you could reverse the order here to match that in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the ones indeed, an aroma from life to life, but to the others, an aroma from death to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 172 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | t3vw | writing-pronouns | οἷς | -1 | Here, the phrase **to the ones** refers to “the ones perishing,” and the phrase **to the {others}** refers to “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom these phrases refer. Alternate translation: “to the latter … to the former” or “to the ones perishing … to the ones being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 173 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | dwk6 | figs-exmetaphor | ὀσμὴ | -1 | an aroma | Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14–15](../02/14.md)). He specifically explains what kind of **aroma** he and those with him are. Those who do not believe think that the **aroma** smells bad, while those who do believe think that the **aroma** smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in [2:14–15](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 174 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | ud2u | figs-idiom | ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον…ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν | 1 | an aroma from death to death | Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the **aroma**, and **to** indicates the effects of the **aroma**. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the **aroma** is characterized completely by either **death** or **life**. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 175 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | yau5 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον…ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 176 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | cdr3 | writing-pronouns | πρὸς ταῦτα | 1 | a fragrance from life to life | Here, the phrase **these {things}** refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in [2:14–16](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **these {things}** refers to. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 177 | 2CO | 2 | 16 | be6x | figs-rquestion | πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? | 1 | who is worthy of these things? | Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (2) Paul and those with him are **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 178 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | h7y1 | grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a basis or proof for why he and those with him are not “sufficient,” as the previous question implied (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “You can tell that we are not sufficient because” (2) an answer to the previous question that indicates that Paul and those with him are “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 179 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | pmpz | figs-exclusive | ἐσμεν…λαλοῦμεν | 1 | Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 180 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | a5sa | figs-metonymy | τὸν λόγον | 1 | who sell the word of God | Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 181 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | u7ui | figs-nominaladj | οἱ πολλοὶ | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 182 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | yf8u | translate-unknown | καπηλεύοντες | 1 | Here, the word **peddling** refers to the practice of selling goods that one has. The word implies that the person who is **peddling** is trying to make as much profit as they can, both by honest and deceitful means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to selling something for as much money as possible. Alternate translation: “trading in” or “selling off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 183 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | ohh8 | figs-possession | τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the word** that could be: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 184 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | u4iy | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ ὡς | -1 | Here Paul uses **but as** to introduce a contrast with **the many** who “peddle” God’s word. Paul repeats **but as** to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast **sincerity** and **from God**. If the repetition of **but as** would be confusing, you could use **but as** once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 185 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | x86y | figs-abstractnouns | ἐξ εἰλικρινείας | 1 | sincerity | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sincerity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 186 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | f9x4 | figs-explicit | ὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the phrase **as from God** indicates that God sent Paul and those with him to **speak** the gospel. The word **as** indicates how they **speak**. It does not mean that they are not really **from God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 187 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | aizg | figs-explicit | λαλοῦμεν | 1 | Here, Paul implies that they are speaking **the word of God** that he already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they **speak** more explicit. Alternate translation: “we speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 188 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | vpdc | figs-explicit | κατέναντι Θεοῦ | 1 | Here, the phrase **in {the} presence of God** could indicate that: (1) they **speak** as they do because they know that **God** sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases **God**. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they **speak** with **God** as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 189 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | q4dc | figs-abstractnouns | κατέναντι Θεοῦ | 1 | before God | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **presence**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to being close to or in front of **God**. Alternate translation: “in front of God” or “before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 190 | 2CO | 2 | 17 | u2zb | figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | we speak in Christ | Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains how they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they **speak** as those who are united to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 191 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | mdwx | figs-exclusive | ἀρχόμεθα…ἑαυτοὺς…μὴ χρῄζομεν | 1 | Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 192 | 2CO | 3 | intro | f7rh | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write down that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to the letters in the alphabet, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language. \n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider what term will express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians as a letter of recommendation for him and those with him. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile. \n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the Israelites could not see the glory on Moses’ face, so anyone who hears the Old Testament without believing in Jesus cannot fully understand it. However, Paul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities. | |||
| 193 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | um8x | figs-rquestion | ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? | 1 | Are we beginning to praise ourselves again? | Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 194 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | ogwa | translate-unknown | ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν | 1 | Here, phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. Alternate translation: “to speak favorably of ourselves” or “to vouch for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 195 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | fuds | figs-explicit | πάλιν | 1 | Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 196 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | noiz | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἢ | 1 | The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With **Or**, then, Paul asks a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need **letters of recommendation**. He introduces this incorrect alternate to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Quite the contrary:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 197 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | y8yc | figs-rquestion | ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? | 1 | We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we? | Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “we do not need them.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “In fact, we certainly do not need, like some, letters of recommendation to you or from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 198 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | syny | writing-pronouns | ὥς τινες | 1 | Here, the word **some** refers generally to other people besides Paul and those with him. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to other people besides Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 199 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | ad1u | figs-possession | συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν | 1 | letters of recommendation | Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to **letters** that gave a **recommendation** for the person who had the letter. Many people in Paul’s culture would ask friends to write these letters, and then they would show the letters to people they visited to prove that they were trustworthy and could be welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to this kind of letter. Alternate translation: “reference letters” or “letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 200 | 2CO | 3 | 1 | dygq | figs-abstractnouns | συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **recommendation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “recommend.” Alternate translation: “letters that recommend us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 201 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | ty59 | figs-metaphor | ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | You yourselves are our letter of recommendation | Here Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they are the **letter** of recommendation for Paul and those with him. This **letter** is not a physical document, but is **written** in their **hearts**, and **all men** can **read** it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (**in our hearts**) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 202 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | f8s8 | figs-rpronouns | ὑμεῖς ἐστε | 1 | Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **You**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **You** in your language. Alternate translation: “You indeed are” or “It is you who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) | |
| 203 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | a7xl | figs-exclusive | ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν…ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the word **our** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “the letter for us who preach the gospel … our hearts” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “my letter … my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 204 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | ygx8 | figs-possession | ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν…ἐνγεγραμμένη | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **letter** that could: (1) recommend “us.” Alternate translation: “the letter for us written” or “a letter that recommends us written” (2) be written by “us.” Alternate translation: “a letter written by us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 205 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | v2e7 | figs-metonymy | ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν | 1 | written on our hearts | In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that the recommendation from the Corinthians is not written down on paper but is rather part of their relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “written inside us” or “expressed by our relationship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 206 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | ko7w | figs-activepassive | ἐνγεγραμμένη | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states in the following verse that “Christ” did it (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). Alternate translation: “that Christ has written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 207 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | bu1u | figs-activepassive | γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | written on our hearts | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which all men know and read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 208 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | pzpz | figs-doublet | γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη | 1 | Here, the words **known** and **read** express very similar ideas. It is likely that **known** indicates that people are aware that there is a **letter**, while **read** indicates that they know what the **letter** says. If you do not have words that express these distinctions, and if the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “read” or “noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) | |
| 209 | 2CO | 3 | 2 | dr5k | figs-gendernotations | πάντων ἀνθρώπων | 1 | known and read by all people | Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “every person” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) |
| 210 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | s717 | figs-explicit | φανερούμενοι | 1 | you are a letter from Christ | Here, the phrase **making known** could: (1) indicate that something is well-known or obvious to people. Alternate translation: “being clear” or “so it is evident” (2) state that the Corinthians show or reveal something to others. Alternate translation: “you making it clear” or “you revealing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 211 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | aylw | figs-metaphor | ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις | 1 | Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a **letter**. Here, he states that this **letter** was written by **Christ** and **administered** by Paul and those with him. What he means by this is that **Christ** is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and he worked through Paul and those with him to do that. Paul then contrasts a **letter** written with **ink** and on **tablets of stone** with a **letter** written by the power of the **Spirit** and on **hearts of flesh**. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the **Spirit**, not by letters written with **ink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 212 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | hlap | figs-possession | ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **letter** is from or written by **Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “a letter from Christ” or “a letter written by Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 213 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | wrk4 | figs-activepassive | διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν | 1 | cared for by us | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we have administered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 214 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | dsxa | translate-unknown | διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 215 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | bfsl | figs-exclusive | ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, just as in [3:1–2](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 216 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | akc6 | figs-infostructure | ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις | 1 | If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 217 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | vyuh | figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις | 1 | These phrases leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 218 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | q96q | figs-activepassive | ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ | 1 | It was written not with ink … on tablets of human hearts | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “Christ” did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 219 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | qt5g | translate-unknown | μέλανι | 1 | It was written not with ink but by the Spirit of the living God | Here, the word **ink** refers to liquid that people in Paul’s culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) |
| 220 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | t5ah | figs-idiom | Θεοῦ ζῶντος | 1 | not on tablets of stone, but on tablets of human hearts | Here, the phrase **living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n |
| 221 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | ana2 | translate-unknown | ἐν πλαξὶν | -1 | Here, the word **tablets** refers to thin, flat pieces of stone on which people would write words, especially important words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what people use to write something important on. Paul may be referring here to the **tablets** on which Moses wrote God’s commandments (see [Exodus 34:1–4](../exo/34/01.md)), so if possible use a word that could refer to those **tablets**. Alternate translation: “on flat pieces … on flat pieces” or “on plaques … on plaques” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 222 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | ih89 | figs-possession | πλαξὶν λιθίναις | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that are made out of **stone**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “stone tablets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 223 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | u959 | figs-possession | πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις | 1 | tablets of human hearts | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that refer to **hearts** that are made of **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “tablets that are fleshly hearts” or “tablets that are hearts made of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 224 | 2CO | 3 | 3 | no25 | figs-metonymy | καρδίαις σαρκίναις | 1 | In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. Here Paul states that these **hearts** are made of **flesh**, which means that they are alive and can function. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of living people” or “of what we think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 225 | 2CO | 3 | 4 | pyev | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in the argument. Here it indicates that Paul is moving on to a slightly different topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces a development in the argument, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 226 | 2CO | 3 | 4 | wy6e | figs-exclusive | ἔχομεν | 1 | Here, just as in [3:1–3](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel have” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 227 | 2CO | 3 | 4 | z7qx | figs-abstractnouns | πεποίθησιν…τοιαύτην ἔχομεν | 1 | such confidence | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we are confident in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 228 | 2CO | 3 | 4 | q0kr | writing-pronouns | πεποίθησιν…τοιαύτην | 1 | Here, the word **such** indicates that the **confidence** is the kind that Paul showed in the previous verses, especially in [3:1–3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that **such** refers back to what Paul has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “that kind of confidence” or “confidence in those ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 229 | 2CO | 3 | 4 | y72k | figs-explicit | πρὸς τὸν Θεόν | 1 | Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and those with him. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 230 | 2CO | 3 | 5 | knf2 | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | οὐχ | 1 | Here, the word **Not** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about **confidence** (see [3:4](../03/04.md)). He wishes to clarify that the **confidence** is not based on themselves but on **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 231 | 2CO | 3 | 5 | i7nt | figs-exclusive | ἑαυτῶν…ἐσμεν…ἑαυτῶν…ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, just as in [3:1–4](../03/01.md), the words **we**, **ourselves**, and **our** do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 232 | 2CO | 3 | 5 | qye9 | figs-explicit | ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί…ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν | 1 | competent in ourselves | Here Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient from ourselves to preach the gospel … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 233 | 2CO | 3 | 5 | e5e7 | ἑαυτῶν…λογίσασθαί | 1 | to consider anything as coming from us | Here, the phrase **to consider** introduces an explanation or elaboration of what **sufficient from ourselves** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or elaboration. Alternate translation: “ourselves, that is, we do not consider” or “ourselves, so that we consider” | |
| 234 | 2CO | 3 | 5 | tws9 | figs-explicit | τι | 1 | Here, the word **anything** refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 235 | 2CO | 3 | 5 | wi1t | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | our competence is from God | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sufficiency**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 236 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | t785 | figs-exclusive | ἡμᾶς διακόνους | 1 | Here, just as in [3:1–5](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 237 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | r5ea | figs-possession | διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and those with him as **servants** who “serve” for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 238 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | j8rd | figs-infostructure | οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος | 1 | If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 239 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | poyq | figs-explicit | οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος | 1 | When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless, but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 240 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | dp6i | figs-metonymy | γράμματος…τὸ…γράμμα | 1 | a new covenant, not of the letter | Here, the word **letter** refers generally to a message written in “letters.” More specifically, Paul uses the word **letter** to refer to the old covenant, which was written down only and could not change people like the **Spirit** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 241 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | bdrz | figs-possession | γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος | 1 | Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **covenant** that is given or mediated by the **Spirit**, not by the **letter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in letters but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 242 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | tc4u | figs-explicit | Πνεύματος…τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα | 1 | but of the Spirit | Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit … but God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit … but the spirit” or “of the heart … but the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 243 | 2CO | 3 | 6 | q4at | figs-personification | τὸ…γράμμα ἀποκτέννει | 1 | the letter kills | Here Paul speaks as if **the letter** were a person who **kills** others. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the letter** (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) |
| 244 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | lyf7 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) |
| 245 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | yzhq | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry** of **death** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 246 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | rife | figs-possession | ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that leads to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 247 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | du65 | figs-explicit | ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | the ministry that produced death | Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Moses “administered” the old covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of this death” or “the act of ministering that led to death” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the old covenant or its laws. Alternate translation: “the system of this death” or “the laws that led to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 248 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | ut6r | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου | 1 | Now if the ministry that produced death … came in such glory | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “administer” and “die.” Alternate translation: “the old covenant, which was administered in a way that causes people die” or “what was administered, which caused people to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 249 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | j1hp | figs-activepassive | ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις | 1 | engraved in letters on stones | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see also [Exodus 34:1](../exo/34/01.md)). Alternate translation: “which God engraved in letters on stones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 250 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | rx13 | figs-explicit | ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις | 1 | Here Paul refers to how God **engraved** or carved the regulations for the **ministry** on **stones** or tablets. Much like in the previous verse, **letters** refers to the alphabet, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 251 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | r5p5 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ | 1 | in such glory | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “was very great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 252 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | myms | figs-explicit | ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην | 1 | Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God **engraved** the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of God’s **glory** became part of Moses’ **face**, and the Israelites could not **look intently** at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 253 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | s9zp | figs-gendernotations | τοὺς υἱοὺς | 1 | Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 254 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | mh54 | translate-kinship | τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) | |
| 255 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | enwt | διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην | 1 | Here, the reason why the Israelites **were not able to look intently** at Moses’ face could be that: (1) Moses’ face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the **glory of his face** was **fading**. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading” | ||
| 256 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | pqbi | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “how his face was shining, even though that was fading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 257 | 2CO | 3 | 7 | ewkr | figs-explicit | τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην | 1 | Here, the word **fading** could describe: (1) the **glory** of Moses’ **face**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face that faded” (2) the **ministry of {this} death**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face, although that ministry was fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 258 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | xxn6 | figs-rquestion | πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ? | 1 | Will the ministry of the Spirit not be with much more glory? | Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 259 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | wkvl | figs-pastforfuture | οὐχὶ…ἔσται | 1 | Here Paul could use the future tense because: (1) he is stating an inference from something in the past, so the inference is future. Paul does not mean that the **ministry** will only have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “then is … not” (2) he is stating that the **ministry** will have **glory** in the future. He could mean that it only has **glory** in the future, or he could mean that it has **glory** in the present and will also have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “will … in the future not be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) | |
| 260 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | wq1v | figs-possession | ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | the ministry of the Spirit | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ministry** that could: (1) lead to people receiving the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 261 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | dhs5 | figs-explicit | ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how Paul and those with him “administered” the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 262 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | o30n | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “administer.” See how you translated this word in [3:7](../03/07.md). Alternate translation: “the new covenant, which was administered in a way that brought the Spirit,” or “what was administered, which gave the Spirit,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 263 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | bmme | figs-explicit | τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 264 | 2CO | 3 | 8 | tcp5 | figs-abstractnouns | μᾶλλον…ἐν δόξῃ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 265 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | m2ci | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two “ministries” in [3:7–8](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 266 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | p7p5 | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of {this} condemnation** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 267 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | ufq6 | figs-explicit | τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως…ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης | 1 | the ministry of righteousness | Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of “ministering.” In this case, the word refers to how people “administered” the the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 268 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | k779 | figs-possession | τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως | 1 | the ministry of condemnation | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **condemnation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 269 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | tcxw | figs-abstractnouns | τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry**, **condemnation**, and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the old covenant, which was administered in a way that caused people to be condemned, was great,” or “what was administered that led to people being condemned was glorious,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 270 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | if33 | figs-exclamations | πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ | 1 | how much more does the ministry of righteousness abound in glory! | Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two “ministries.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two “ministries.” Alternate translation: “then certainly much more the ministry of this righteousness abounds in glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) |
| 271 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | egmy | figs-possession | ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 272 | 2CO | 3 | 9 | e5zz | figs-abstractnouns | πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ. | 1 | the ministry of righteousness abound in glory | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry**, **righteousness**, and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the new covenant, which is administered in a way that makes people righteous, is even more great,” or “what is administered that leads to people being righteous is even more glorious,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 273 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | q8bg | grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ γὰρ | 1 | Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md) (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 274 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | n4pe | figs-explicit | τὸ δεδοξασμένον…τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης | 1 | that which was once made glorious is no longer glorious … because of the glory that exceeds it | Here, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and those with him serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 275 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | t2dq | figs-activepassive | οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον | 1 | that which was once made glorious | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 276 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | hmcu | figs-infostructure | οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει | 1 | Here, the phrase **in this part** could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is **not glorified**. In other words, **in this part** introduces the way in which something that has **been glorified** can actually be **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) **{what} had been glorified**. In other words, the old covenant was **glorified** only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 277 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | es4c | figs-idiom | ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει | 1 | Here, the phrase **in this part** indicates that a statement is only true in **part** or in some specific way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the qualification that some statement or action is partially true or accurate. Alternate translation: “in a sense” or “in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 278 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | d7k5 | figs-doublet | ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει εἵνεκεν | 1 | in this respect | Here, the phrase **in this part** and the word **because** both introduce how or why **{what} had been glorified** is **not glorified**. Paul uses both elements because he wants to make his point very clear. If the repetition would not make the point clearer, and if using both elements would be confusing in your language, you could use one word or phrase that introduces how what was **glorified** is **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “because of” or “in comparison to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) |
| 279 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | pvbx | figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “what was much more glorious” or “what was even greater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 280 | 2CO | 3 | 10 | f2mo | τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης | 1 | Alternate translation: “the glory that surpasses it” | ||
| 281 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | grwl | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the comparison between the two covenants and their **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 282 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | r7c9 | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ | 1 | Paul is speaking as if the **glory** of **{what} is fading away** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 283 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | ym37 | τὸ καταργούμενον | 1 | Here, the words translated **{what} is fading away** could indicate: (1) that something is disappearing or temporary without stating that anyone is making it disappear. Alternate translation: “what is passing away” (2) that God is causing something to disappear or pass away. Alternate translation: “what is being abolished” or “what God is abolishing” | ||
| 284 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | zwb2 | figs-metaphor | τὸ καταργούμενον | 1 | that which was fading away | Here, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that, just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 285 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | hm9d | figs-explicit | τὸ καταργούμενον…τὸ μένον | 1 | Here, the phrase **{what} is fading away** refers to the old covenant, while the phrase **{what} remains** refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 286 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | wtht | figs-abstractnouns | διὰ δόξης…ἐν δόξῃ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 287 | 2CO | 3 | 11 | wrf4 | figs-exclamations | πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ | 1 | Here, the phrase **much more** marks this clause as an exclamation, not a question. Paul uses this exclamation to emphatically contrast the two covenants. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally contrasts the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly much more what remains will come with glory.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) | |
| 288 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | tnc1 | grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Since we have such a hope | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in [3:4–11](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 289 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | ib35 | grammar-connect-logic-result | ἔχοντες | 1 | Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 290 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | j76k | figs-abstractnouns | ἔχοντες…τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 291 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | u5qa | writing-pronouns | τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα | 1 | such a hope | Here, the word **such** refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). In other words, the **hope** is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **such** refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 292 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | rf9h | figs-exclusive | χρώμεθα | 1 | Here, just as in [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 293 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | zbff | figs-explicit | χρώμεθα | 1 | Here Paul does not exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 294 | 2CO | 3 | 12 | b5ql | figs-abstractnouns | πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 295 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | fb59 | figs-explicit | καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς | 1 | Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and those with him show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and those with him can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrasts more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 296 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | p1y3 | figs-explicit | Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου | 1 | Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, disappeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 297 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | boui | figs-gendernotations | τοὺς υἱοὺς | 1 | Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 298 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | pdnk | translate-kinship | τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ | 1 | Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) | |
| 299 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | vuyk | figs-explicit | τὸ τέλος | 1 | Here, the word **end** could refer to: (1) the result of the **fading**, which was that the “glory” completely stopped shining from Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the cessation” or “the termination” (2) the purpose or implication of how the “glory” ceased shining from Moses’ face, which was that the old covenant too would cease. Alternate translation: “the result” or “the meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 300 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | p5u2 | figs-explicit | τοῦ καταργουμένου | 1 | the end of that which was fading away | Here, the phrase **{what} was fading away** could refer to: (1) the “glory” that shone from the **face** of Moses. In this case, Paul could also be implying that the old covenant would also “fade.” Alternate translation: “of the glory that was fading from his face” (2) the old covenant, that would “fade away” when God instituted a new covenant. Alternate translation: “of the covenant that would fade away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 301 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | mczg | figs-possession | τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **{what} was fading away** completely ceased or “ended.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 302 | 2CO | 3 | 13 | fe5r | figs-abstractnouns | τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **end**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “end” or “cease.” Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” or “what ceased after fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 303 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | kb8y | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | Here, the word **But** could introduce a contrast between: (1) being able to “look intently” and having **hardened** minds. Alternate translation: “But instead of looking intently,” (2) what Moses did (veiling his face) and what the Israelites did (have **hardened** minds). Alternate translation: “In contrast to Moses,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 304 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | csl1 | writing-pronouns | τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 305 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | khkq | figs-activepassive | ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 306 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | zvf5 | figs-metaphor | ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν | 1 | But their minds were hardened | Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that changes when something hits it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 307 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | tzbd | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “and this is how:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 308 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | zm7j | figs-idiom | ἄχρι…τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας | 1 | For until this present day | Here, the phrase **until the present day** refers to all the time before and including the **present day**, which is the time when Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time that includes the past and the present. Alternate translation: “up to the present” or “in the past and in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 309 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | w68p | figs-metaphor | τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον | 1 | when they read the old covenant, that same veil remains | Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 310 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | wcbv | figs-infostructure | τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον | 1 | Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain how the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, and it is not lifted” (2) go with **remains** and explain what **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains not having been lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 311 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | wymg | figs-explicit | τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα | 1 | Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 312 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | gg2d | figs-possession | ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης | 1 | when they read the old covenant | Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 313 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | orvo | figs-metonymy | τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης | 1 | Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 314 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | gl8l | figs-activepassive | μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον | 1 | It has not been removed, because only in Christ is it taken away | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not lifting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 315 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | vygf | grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅτι | 1 | Here, the word **because** could indicate why: (1) the **veil** is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted because” (2) the **veil remains**. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 316 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | m7lk | figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why and how the **veil** is “lifted.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ leads to the “lifting” of the **veil**. Alternate translation: “only when a person is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 317 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | r1lt | figs-explicit | καταργεῖται | 1 | Here, the phrase **fading away** is the same phrase that Paul used to describe how the “glory” was “fading” from Moses’ face (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). What Paul means is that the **veil** disappears or is removed **in Christ**. If possible, use a word or phrase that reminds your readers of how you translated “fading” in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “is it being abolished” or “is it disappearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 318 | 2CO | 3 | 14 | rhid | writing-pronouns | καταργεῖται | 1 | Here, the word **it** could refer to: (1) the **veil**. Alternate translation: “is this veil fading away” (2) the **old covenant**. Alternate translation: “is this covenant fading away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 319 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | cv2j | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλ’ | 1 | Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about the veil “fading away” in Christ ([3:14](../03/14.md)). What Paul says in the rest of the verse repeats many of the ideas from the first parts of [3:14](../03/14.md). Consider whether a contrast word or a connecting word expresses the idea most clearly. Alternate translation: “However,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 320 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | rjh5 | figs-idiom | ἕως σήμερον | 1 | But even today | Here the phrase **until today** refers to all the time before and including the present day, which is the time when Paul wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time that includes the past and the present. See how you translated the similar phrase “until the present day” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “up to the present” or “in the past and in the present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 321 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | t3dl | figs-metonymy | ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς | 1 | whenever Moses is read | Here, the word **Moses** could refer to: (1) the first five books of the Old Testament, often called “the Law” or the “Pentateuch.” Alternate translation: “the Law is read” or “the first parts of the Old Testament are read” (2) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are read” or “the Old Testament is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 322 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | ip29 | figs-activepassive | ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone reads Moses” or “they hear someone read Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 323 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | bb5u | figs-metaphor | κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται | 1 | Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is like a veil that lies over their heart” or “they do not understand, as if a veil lies over their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 324 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | gwp9 | figs-metonymy | ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν | 1 | a veil lies over their heart | In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “over their mind” or “over their understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 325 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | z5zh | grammar-collectivenouns | τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν | 1 | Here the author is speaking of “hearts” in general, not of one particular **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 326 | 2CO | 3 | 15 | lmu6 | writing-pronouns | τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν | 1 | Here, the word **their** could refer to: (1) anyone who hears the reading of **Moses** without being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “the hearts of those who listen” (2) the same people that “their” referred to in [3:14](../03/14.md): the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites’ heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 327 | 2CO | 3 | 16 | k2dr | figs-metaphor | ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον | 1 | whenever a person turns to the Lord | Here, the phrase **turn to {the} Lord** refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 328 | 2CO | 3 | 16 | aqna | writing-pronouns | ἐπιστρέψῃ | 1 | Here, the word **one** refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 329 | 2CO | 3 | 16 | wawh | figs-explicit | Κύριον | 1 | Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God the Lord” (2) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 330 | 2CO | 3 | 16 | mibm | figs-metaphor | περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα | 1 | Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil was taken away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 331 | 2CO | 3 | 16 | w1y2 | figs-activepassive | περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα | 1 | the veil is taken away | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 332 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | lrxy | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 333 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | ulmp | figs-explicit | ὁ…Κύριος…Κυρίου | 1 | Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 334 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | erpi | figs-explicit | τὸ Πνεῦμά…τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου | 1 | Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit … that Spirit of the Lord is” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “the spirit … the spirit of the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 335 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | f2o7 | ὁ…Κύριος τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν | 1 | Here Paul could mean that: (1) the “Lord” mentioned in [3:16](../03/16.md) is the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of whom I speak is the Holy Spirit” (2) believers encounter God the **Lord** as the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord is experienced as the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Lord** is “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “the Lord is a spirit” | ||
| 336 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | sp81 | figs-metaphor | οὗ…τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία | 1 | Here Paul speaks of the **Spirit** being in a place, and so **freedom** also is in that place. Here speaks in this way to connect the **Spirit** and **freedom**. He means that whoever has the **Spirit** also has **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 337 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | b016 | figs-possession | τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** as belonging to or part of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is the Lord is” or “the Spirit who belongs to the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 338 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | uoss | figs-abstractnouns | ἐλευθερία | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **freedom**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “people are free” or “you are free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 339 | 2CO | 3 | 17 | ao12 | figs-explicit | ἐλευθερία | 1 | Here Paul does not give any details about what people experience **freedom** from or for. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the **freedom**, it could be **freedom** (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 340 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | r6rx | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Now we all | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous section. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about Moses and the veil in [3:12–17](../03/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “Finally,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) |
| 341 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | l3xw | figs-metaphor | ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι | 1 | with unveiled faces, see as a reflection the glory of the Lord | Here the author speaks as if believers do not have a “veil” over their “faces” and can thus “reflect” God’s **glory**. Since the veiling language is an important part of what Paul is saying, you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea by using a simile. Paul is indicating a contrast that could be: (1) with Moses, who had to veil the glory on his face. Unlike him, believers do not need to veil their faces. Alternate translation: “revealing the glory of the Lord like those who have unveiled faces” (2) the Israelites, who could not look directly at the glory of God. Unlike them, believers can see God’s glory directly without a “veil.” Alternate translation: “seeing the glory of the Lord, unlike those who could only see a veil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 342 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | ui8y | translate-unknown | κατοπτριζόμενοι | 1 | Here, the word translated **reflecting** could refer to: (1) acting as a mirror that “reflects” an image. Alternate translation: “mirroring” (2) seeing something that is “reflected” in a mirror. Alternate translation: “seeing in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 343 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | mdu9 | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “how great the Lord is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 344 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | brpu | figs-explicit | Κυρίου | 1 | Here, just as in [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “of God the Lord” or “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 345 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | rc9x | figs-activepassive | μεταμορφούμεθα | 1 | are being transformed into the same image | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “are those whom God is transforming into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 346 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | cq3i | figs-explicit | τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα | 1 | Here, the phrase **the same image** refers to the **image** that belongs to the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “the that image” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 347 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | g0ku | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα…ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **image** and **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 348 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | bx5b | figs-idiom | ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν | 1 | from glory to glory | Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word, much like he did in [2:16](../02/16.md). He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the transformation, and **to** indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by **glory**. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 349 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | mw3v | καθάπερ ἀπὸ | 1 | just as from the Lord | Here, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by” | |
| 350 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | wlp1 | Κυρίου, Πνεύματος | 1 | Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, just as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit” | ||
| 351 | 2CO | 3 | 18 | mmdd | figs-explicit | Πνεύματος | 1 | Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 352 | 2CO | 4 | intro | rx1c | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “death” or “dying,” he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and those with him experience “life” or being “raised,” he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from “death” when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as “veiling,” “blinding,” and “darkness.” He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as “shining” and “light.” These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and those with him: their “inner man” and their “outer man.” The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the “inner” is connected to what is “not seen,” and the “outer” is connected to what is “seen” (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person. \n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. | |||
| 353 | 2CO | 4 | 1 | lyi4 | grammar-connect-logic-result | διὰ τοῦτο | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 354 | 2CO | 4 | 1 | ln4n | grammar-connect-logic-result | ἔχοντες | 1 | Here, the word having introduces a reason why Paul and those with him **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 355 | 2CO | 4 | 1 | uoxl | figs-abstractnouns | ἔχοντες τὴν διακονίαν ταύτην | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister.” Alternate translation: “being able to minister in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n | |
| 356 | 2CO | 4 | 1 | h1ud | figs-explicit | καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν | 1 | and just as we have received mercy | Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and those with him received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and those with him receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 357 | 2CO | 4 | 1 | que0 | figs-abstractnouns | ἠλεήθημεν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mercy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 358 | 2CO | 4 | 1 | ix7n | translate-unknown | οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν | 1 | having this ministry | Here, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) |
| 359 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | yp4g | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | ἀλλὰ | 1 | we have rejected the shameful hidden things | Here, the word **Instead** introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse ([4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) |
| 360 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | z4c2 | figs-explicit | τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης | 1 | the shameful hidden things | Here, the phrase **shameful hidden {things}** could refer to: (1) things that people “hide” because they are **shameful**. Alternate translation: “the shameful things that people hide” (2) things that are both **hidden** and **shameful**. Alternate translation: “anything that is shameful and hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 361 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | ey75 | figs-metaphor | μὴ περιπατοῦντες | 1 | walking in craftiness | Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking in** something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with plain language. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 362 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | vvzc | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν πανουργίᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **craftiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “crafty” or an adverb such as “craftily.” Alternate translation: “craftily” or “in a crafty way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 363 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | lzn0 | translate-unknown | δολοῦντες | 1 | Here, the word **distorting** refers to changing something so that it is different than how it started. In this case, Paul is referring to changing **the word of God** so that it is not purely what God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to changing something or making it less pure. Alternate translation: “perverting” or “altering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 364 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | gcqm | figs-possession | τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 365 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | gp3g | figs-metonymy | τὸν λόγον | 1 | not distorting the word of God | Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 366 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | mrri | figs-possession | τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **manifestation** that reveals **the truth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “by revealing the truth” or “by making the truth known** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 367 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | e7y7 | figs-abstractnouns | τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **manifestation** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “reveal” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “by revealing what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 368 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | rqin | translate-unknown | συνιστάνοντες ἑαυτοὺς | 1 | Here, phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. See you how you translated the similar phrase in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “speaking favorably of ourselves” or “vouching for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 369 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | aj24 | figs-gendernotations | ἀνθρώπων | 1 | commending ourselves to every person’s conscience | Although the word **man’s** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person’s” or “to man’s and woman’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) |
| 370 | 2CO | 4 | 2 | f6n1 | figs-metaphor | ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | before God | Here, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 371 | 2CO | 4 | 3 | lu2h | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse ([4:2](../04/02.md)). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be **veiled** to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 372 | 2CO | 4 | 3 | m82q | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ…καὶ | 1 | Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 373 | 2CO | 4 | 3 | mti5 | figs-metaphor | ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον | 1 | But if our gospel is veiled, it is veiled only to those who are perishing | Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 374 | 2CO | 4 | 3 | hz2f | figs-activepassive | εἰ…ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν…ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον | 1 | if our gospel is veiled, it is veiled | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “veiling” and instead refer to how a “veil” hides the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, this happens for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 375 | 2CO | 4 | 3 | e5yu | figs-extrainfo | τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις | 1 | our gospel | Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) |
| 376 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | m71d | figs-explicit | ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου | 1 | Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 377 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | ptb6 | figs-possession | ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 378 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | r6pz | figs-metaphor | ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | the god of this age has blinded the minds of the unbelieving | Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ … just like blind eyes cannot see light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 379 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | squ9 | grammar-connect-logic-result | ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ | 1 | Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “ of the unbelievers in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 380 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | j1vz | figs-possession | τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | the light of the gospel | Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 381 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | hj21 | figs-abstractnouns | τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 382 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | fmaq | figs-abstractnouns | ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **image**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 383 | 2CO | 4 | 4 | tx9h | figs-possession | εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | the god of this world | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **Christ** functions as the **image** that shows what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the image that shows what God is like” or “the image that reflects God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 384 | 2CO | 4 | 5 | nvg2 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about “the gospel of the glory of Christ” in [4:4](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 385 | 2CO | 4 | 5 | ddw1 | figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν | 1 | but Christ Jesus as Lord, and ourselves as your servants | These two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 386 | 2CO | 4 | 5 | xvs8 | Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον | 1 | Here, the phrase **Lord Christ Jesus** could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that **Christ Jesus** is the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord” | ||
| 387 | 2CO | 4 | 5 | t8du | figs-explicit | διὰ Ἰησοῦν | 1 | for Jesus’ sake | Here Paul could be indicating that he and those with him are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and those with him to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 388 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | nbpt | grammar-connect-logic-result | ὅτι | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and those with him “do not proclaim” themselves but rather Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 389 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | fy6h | writing-quotations | ὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών | 1 | Here Paul introduces something that God **said**. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing [Genesis 1:3](../gen/01/03.md), and he may also be referring to [Isaiah 9:2](../isa/09/02.md). Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 390 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | rw5z | figs-quotations | εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει | 1 | Light will shine out of darkness | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) |
| 391 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | mukf | figs-abstractnouns | ἐκ σκότους | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 392 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | d5x7 | figs-metaphor | ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως | 1 | He has shone … to give the light of the knowledge of the glory of God | Here Paul continues the light metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 393 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | bj1j | figs-metonymy | ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν | 1 | in our hearts | In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 394 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | m6rf | figs-exclusive | ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 395 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | fkq3 | figs-possession | φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times in a row. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 396 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | mpg9 | figs-abstractnouns | πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | the light of the knowledge of the glory of God | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 397 | 2CO | 4 | 6 | p736 | figs-explicit | ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ | Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shone on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 398 | 2CO | 4 | 7 | xe5i | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | But we have | Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and those with him are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) |
| 399 | 2CO | 4 | 7 | xx2c | figs-metaphor | ἔχομεν…τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν | 1 | we have this treasure in jars of clay | Here Paul speaks of the knowledge about God’s glory as if it were a **treasure**, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were **clay jars**, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (**the treasure**) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (**clay jars**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 400 | 2CO | 4 | 7 | yzd7 | writing-pronouns | τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον | 1 | Here, the word **this** identifies the **treasure** as “the knowledge of the glory of God in {the} face of Jesus Christ” (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 401 | 2CO | 4 | 7 | nz0r | translate-unknown | ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν | 1 | Here, the word **jars** refers to any type of container that is meant to hold something else. The word **clay** refers to dirt or mud, which was used to make inexpensive and fragile containers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to containers made out of cheap and weak material. Alternate translation: “inexpensive containers” or “fragile and cheap vessels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 402 | 2CO | 4 | 7 | i1rs | figs-possession | ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to characterize the **power** as something with **surpassing greatness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the surpassing greatness that characterizes the power” or “the surpassingly great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 403 | 2CO | 4 | 7 | u16o | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **greatness** and **power**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “great” and “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how surpassingly great and powerful these things are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 404 | 2CO | 4 | 8 | ga9z | figs-activepassive | ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι; ἀπορούμενοι | 1 | We are afflicted in every way | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use vague or indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “in every side someone pressing us in, but not crushing us; feeling perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 405 | 2CO | 4 | 8 | wqg9 | figs-infostructure | ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι | 1 | Here, the phrase **in every {side}** could go with: (1) all the statements in this verse and the following verse. Alternate translation: “in every situation experiencing these things: being pressed in” (2) just the first statement about **being pressed in, but not being crushed**. Alternate translation: “being pressed in on every side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 406 | 2CO | 4 | 8 | vhjn | figs-explicit | ἐν παντὶ | 1 | Here, the word **every** indicates that what Paul is about to describe happens often or in many situations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “at many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 407 | 2CO | 4 | 8 | fi9c | figs-metaphor | θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were physically being **pressed in** by other people but not **being crushed** by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 408 | 2CO | 4 | 8 | i7id | translate-unknown | ἀπορούμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐξαπορούμενοι | 1 | Here, the word **perplexed** refers to how someone is not sure what to do. The word **despairing** refers to giving up or refusing to do anything. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that express these ideas clearly. Alternate translation: “being unsure, but not losing hope” or “being confused, but not despondent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 409 | 2CO | 4 | 9 | bz8m | figs-activepassive | διωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι | 1 | We are persecuted but not forsaken | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use vague or indefinite subjects for **persecuted** and **thrown down**, you indicate that God is the one who does not “forsake.” Alternate translation: “someone persecuting us, but God not forsaking us; someone throwing us down, but we not perishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 410 | 2CO | 4 | 9 | uvq1 | figs-metaphor | καταβαλλόμενοι | 1 | We are struck down but not destroyed | Here, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and those with him so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and those with him, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 411 | 2CO | 4 | 9 | mz1m | translate-unknown | οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι | 1 | Here, the word **perishing** refers to being defeated or destroyed. Paul means that those who “throw” him and those with him down do not succeed in defeating or destroying them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural construction. Alternate translation: “not being destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 412 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | zt4b | figs-metaphor | τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες | 1 | We always carry in our body the death of Jesus | Here Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and those with him could “carry around.” He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and those with him proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 413 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | ethc | grammar-collectivenouns | τῷ σώματι…τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν | 1 | Here the author is speaking of their “bodies” in general, not of one particular **body**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to their “bodies” in general. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 414 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | rnup | figs-possession | τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **dying** that **Jesus** experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 415 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | l6f6 | figs-explicit | καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ | 1 | the life of Jesus also may be shown in our bodies | Here, the “revelation” of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they “reveal” the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 416 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | w3jc | figs-activepassive | καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ | 1 | the life of Jesus also may be shown in our bodies | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 417 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | k10l | figs-possession | ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **life** that could: (1) belong to **Jesus**. In other words, it is his resurrection life. Alternate translation: “the life that Jesus has” (2) come from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “life from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 418 | 2CO | 4 | 10 | j23j | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 419 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | vivg | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification of what Paul said in [4:10](../04/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “in fact,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 420 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | l1xk | figs-activepassive | ἀεὶ…ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες…παραδιδόμεθα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is always handing us, being alive, over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 421 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | ggb5 | grammar-connect-time-simultaneous | ἀεὶ…ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες…παραδιδόμεθα | 1 | Here, the phrase **being alive** identifies the situation in which the rest of Paul’s statement is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “we, during the time in which we are alive, are always being handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) | |
| 422 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | ht74 | figs-metaphor | ἀεὶ…εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα | 1 | For we who are alive are always being handed over to death for the sake of Jesus | Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him were objects that someone could “hand over” to **death**. He means that they are under the power of **death** or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under death’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 423 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | admc | figs-abstractnouns | εἰς θάνατον | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 424 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | wt5i | figs-explicit | διὰ Ἰησοῦν | 1 | Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and those with him **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 425 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | d1wm | ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν | 1 | so that the life of Jesus may be shown in our mortal flesh | Here Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of [4:10](../04/10.md). You should express the idea much like you did in that verse. | |
| 426 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | ww5r | figs-activepassive | καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ | 1 | so that the life of Jesus may be shown in our mortal flesh | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 427 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | r513 | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 428 | 2CO | 4 | 11 | kucp | translate-unknown | τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase **mortal flesh** primarily refers to how people will die. Paul may be referring specifically to the physical part of people, but he may simply be referring to people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 429 | 2CO | 4 | 12 | dc7q | grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion that is based on [4:7–11](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 430 | 2CO | 4 | 12 | q3il | figs-personification | ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | death is at work in us, but life is at work in you | Here Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those with experience things related to **death**, while the Corinthians experience things related to **life**. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) |
| 431 | 2CO | 4 | 12 | r5se | figs-abstractnouns | ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live.” Alternate translation: “we are dying, but you are living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 432 | 2CO | 4 | 12 | n7or | figs-explicit | δὲ | 1 | Here Paul may be: (1) simply contrasting **death and **life**. Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (2) indicating that the **death** in them leads to the **life in you**. Alternate translation: “but so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 433 | 2CO | 4 | 12 | tvne | figs-ellipsis | ἡ…ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “life works in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 434 | 2CO | 4 | 12 | albz | figs-explicit | ἡ…ζωὴ | 1 | Here, the word **life** could refer: (1) specifically to resurrection life, which the Corinthians will receive. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (2) generally to being alive and not experiencing suffering or dangerous things. Alternate translation: “the experience of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 435 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | jqmm | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** could introduce: (1) a development or new idea. Alternate translation: “Further,” (2) a contrast with the “death” that works in them. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 436 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | cckc | grammar-connect-logic-result | ἔχοντες | 1 | Here, the word **having** introduces a reason or cause for why **we also believe** and **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 437 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | ret6 | figs-possession | τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως | 1 | the same spirit of faith | Here Paul uses the possessive to refer a **spirit** that could: (1) be characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 438 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | wrr3 | τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα | 1 | Here, the word **spirit** could refer to: (1) a human spirit or attitude, which is characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same attitude” (2) the Holy Spirit, who gives **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same Holy Spirit” | ||
| 439 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | ery0 | figs-explicit | τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως | 1 | Here, the word **same** could indicate that: (1) this is the **same spirit** that the person who wrote the quotation had. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that the psalmist had,” (2) this is the **same spirit** that the Corinthians also have. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that you have,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 440 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | qma7 | figs-abstractnouns | τῆς πίστεως | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 441 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | gzf4 | figs-activepassive | τὸ γεγραμμένον | 1 | according to that which was written | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “what the psalmist wrote” or “to what the psalm says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 442 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | il5h | writing-quotations | κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον | 1 | I believed, and so I spoke | In Paul’s culture, **according to {what} has been written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 116:10](../psa/116/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “as it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) |
| 443 | 2CO | 4 | 13 | vshy | figs-quotations | τὸ γεγραμμένον, ἐπίστευσα, διὸ ἐλάλησα; | 1 | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “how it was written that he believed; therefore he spoke,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 444 | 2CO | 4 | 14 | sfxb | grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰδότες | 1 | Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and those with him do (see [4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 445 | 2CO | 4 | 14 | ruov | writing-pronouns | ὁ ἐγείρας | 1 | Here, the word **one** refers to God the Father, who **raised Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “God who raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 446 | 2CO | 4 | 14 | t2i8 | figs-idiom | ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἡμᾶς…ἐγερεῖ | 1 | that the one who raised the Lord Jesus will … raise | Paul uses the words **raised** and **raise** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one having restored Jesus to life will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 447 | 2CO | 4 | 14 | zd0j | figs-explicit | σὺν Ἰησοῦ | 1 | Here, the phrase **with Jesus** could indicate that the Paul and those with him will: (1) be where **Jesus** is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as **Jesus** was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 448 | 2CO | 4 | 14 | zmzy | translate-unknown | παραστήσει σὺν ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, the phrase **will present** refers to causing someone to stand in front of or beside someone else. Here, the idea is most likely that God causes Paul and those with him to stand before God and beside **you**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “will set us before him next to you” or “will bring us together before him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 449 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | w37z | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul has said in [4:7–14](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 450 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | v7sj | figs-explicit | τὰ…πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς | 1 | For all these things are for your sake | Here, the phrase **all these {things}** refers to everything that Paul and those with him do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see [4:7–12](../04/07.md)) and the message that they preach (see [4:13–14](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 451 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | wl88 | figs-explicit | ἡ χάρις | 1 | Here Paul implies that the **grace** comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “grace from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 452 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | lg1l | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ χάρις | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “how God is gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 453 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | xdxk | figs-explicit | διὰ τῶν πλειόνων | 1 | Here, the phrase **through more and more** could indicate that: (1) the **grace** increases by being received by **more** people. Alternate translation: “among more and more people” (2) the **grace** increases because God uses **more** situations and experiences to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “by means of more and more service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 454 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | u8pp | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | thanksgiving may increase | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **thanksgiving** and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “thank” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “may cause people to abound in thanking God to glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 455 | 2CO | 4 | 15 | zt5h | figs-possession | εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **glory** that **God** receives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to glory for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 456 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | u6e5 | grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in [4:7–15](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 457 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | p7pv | translate-unknown | οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν | 1 | See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 458 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | cb92 | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ καὶ | 1 | So we do not become discouraged | Here Paul is speaking as if **our outer man is decaying** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that **our outer man** is indeed **decaying**. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) |
| 459 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | hhv6 | figs-explicit | ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος | 1 | outwardly we are wasting away | Here, the phrase **outer man** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others can observe and see. Alternate translation: “our observable part” or “our external part” (2) the physical part of the person. Alternate translation: “our body” or “our physical part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 460 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | pnms | figs-gendernotations | ἄνθρωπος…ἔσω | 1 | Although the word **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 461 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | jcra | grammar-collectivenouns | ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται…ἔσω…ἀνακαινοῦται | 1 | Here the author is speaking of **outer** and **inner** “men” in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “men” or “people” in general. Alternate translation: “men are decaying … inner men are being renewed” or “persons are decaying … outer persons are being renewed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 462 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | vliu | figs-metaphor | διαφθείρεται | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if the **outer man** were a dead thing that was **decaying**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **outer man** is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 463 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | s9b2 | figs-explicit | ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν | 1 | inwardly we are being renewed day by day | Here, the phrase **inner {man}** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others cannot observe and see. Alternate translation: “our hidden part” or “our inward part” (2) the spiritual part of the person. Alternate translation: “our heart” or “our spiritual part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 464 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | zct5 | figs-activepassive | ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται | 1 | inwardly we are being renewed day by day | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inner man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 465 | 2CO | 4 | 16 | l0jk | figs-idiom | ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ | 1 | Here, the phrase **day {by} day** refers to something that happens one day, and then the next day, and so on. One way of expressing this idea is with the phrase “every day.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to sequential days. Alternate translation: “each day” or “every single day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 466 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | no4a | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “do not become discouraged” (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 467 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | e4s0 | figs-abstractnouns | τὸ…παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **affliction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “afflict” or “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how we are afflicted in light and momentary ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 468 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | x1du | translate-unknown | παραυτίκα | 1 | Here, the word **momentary** identifies something as temporary or only lasting for a short time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “short-lived” or “fleeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 469 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | pd63 | figs-metaphor | ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως…αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης | 1 | this momentary, light affliction is preparing us for an eternal weight of glory | Here Paul describes **affliction** and **glory** as if they were objects that could be **light** or have **weight**. He speaks in this way to indicate how unimportant or insignificant the **affliction** is compared with how important or significant the **glory** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “small affliction … an eternal, great glory” or “insignificant affliction … an eternal, significant glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 470 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | jzhi | figs-metaphor | κατεργάζεται ἡμῖν | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if the **affliction** were a process that was **producing** the **glory**. He means that the **affliction** leads to **glory** for **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “is leading us to” or “is enabling us to gain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 471 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | qv6f | figs-possession | αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **an eternal weight** that is made up of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “an eternal weight that is glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 472 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | xg92 | figs-abstractnouns | δόξης | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of what is great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 473 | 2CO | 4 | 17 | na9y | figs-idiom | καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν | 1 | that exceeds all measurement | Here, the phrase **far beyond all comparison** identifies something that is much greater than anything else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies something that is greatest or most amazing. Alternate translation: “that is greater than anything” or “that is the greatest of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 474 | 2CO | 4 | 18 | thyv | grammar-connect-logic-result | μὴ σκοπούντων ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase **We are not watching** could introduce: (1) a result or inference from what Paul said about “affliction” and “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, we are not watching” (2) what Paul does while he experiences the “affliction” he mentions in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true while we are not watching” (3) the reason why the “affliction” leads to “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true because we are not watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 475 | 2CO | 4 | 18 | fp4f | figs-explicit | μὴ σκοπούντων | 1 | Here, the word **watching** refers specifically to focusing on something or paying close attention to something. It does not require the attention or focus to be visual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to non-visual focus or attention. Alternate translation: “are not focusing on” or “are not concentrating on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 476 | 2CO | 4 | 18 | t2fp | figs-activepassive | τὰ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα | 1 | things that are seen … things that are unseen | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “the things that people see, but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 477 | 2CO | 4 | 18 | f97x | figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα | 1 | but for things that are unseen | This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 478 | 2CO | 4 | 18 | hbrg | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 479 | 2CO | 4 | 18 | kx7m | figs-activepassive | τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα…τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 480 | 2CO | 5 | intro | s14p | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and those with him “groan” while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and those with him do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body. \n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being “away from the body” and “with the Lord.” As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe. \n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God “reconciles” people to himself and gives the “ministry of reconciliation” to Paul and those with him. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The “clothes” are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (“clothed”), not without bodies (“naked” or “unclothed”). He does not use “clothing” language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the “clothing” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together “home” and “clothing” language would be confusing, you may need to use only the “home” language and express the “clothing” language plainly or as “home” language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and those with him without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.” \n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “interchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this “interchange” occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of “interchange” and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. | |||
| 481 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | p7b7 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Connecting Statement: | (1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) |
| 482 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | v03z | figs-exclusive | οἴδαμεν…ἡμῶν…ἔχομεν | 1 | Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and those with him. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 483 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | la71 | grammar-connect-condition-fact | ἐὰν | 1 | Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 484 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | z4vs | figs-exmetaphor | ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς | 1 | if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed, we have a building from God | Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** that the person lives in. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down** because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify what the **house** is in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 485 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | zy2k | figs-activepassive | ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ | 1 | if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 486 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | bvz6 | figs-possession | ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους | 1 | Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the **earthly house** as a **tent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 487 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | gz3c | grammar-collectivenouns | ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν…οἰκίαν…αἰώνιον | 1 | Here and throughout [5:1–8](../05/01.md), Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) | |
| 488 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | xifl | figs-explicit | ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς | 1 | Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, Paul refers to how the **eternal house** can be found **in the heavens**. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 489 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | bqi5 | figs-synecdoche | ἀχειροποίητον | 1 | It is a house not made by human hands | Here, the word **hands** refers to the main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “not made by humans” or “not made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) |
| 490 | 2CO | 5 | 1 | bbvr | figs-activepassive | ἀχειροποίητον | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 491 | 2CO | 5 | 2 | mt4s | grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ γὰρ | 1 | Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous verse (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 492 | 2CO | 5 | 2 | tc2j | writing-pronouns | ἐν τούτῳ | 1 | in this tent we groan | Here, the phrase **in this** could refer to: (1) the earthly house that is a tent, that is, the person’s current body. Alternate translation: “in this tent” or “in our bodies on earth” (2) the current time period. Alternate translation: “right now” or “in this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 493 | 2CO | 5 | 2 | yg6y | figs-exmetaphor | ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες | 1 | Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in [5:1](../05/01.md). Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) | |
| 494 | 2CO | 5 | 2 | ss6g | figs-activepassive | ἐπενδύσασθαι | 1 | longing to be clothed with our heavenly dwelling | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to fully clothe us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 495 | 2CO | 5 | 3 | bjau | figs-exmetaphor | ἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα | 1 | Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as if they were clothing. You should express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “we have a house to live in, we will not be found homeless” or “having a new body that is like clothing, we will not be found naked, that is, without a body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) | |
| 496 | 2CO | 5 | 3 | da0z | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἴ γε…ἐνδυσάμενοι | 1 | Here Paul is speaking as if **having clothed ourselves** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will actually be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when” or “whenever.” Alternate translation: “when indeed we have clothed ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 497 | 2CO | 5 | 3 | i4es | ἐνδυσάμενοι | 1 | we have put it on | Here Paul could mean that: (1) **we** clothe **ourselves**. Alternate translation: “we clothe ourselves” (2) God clothes “us.” Alternate translation: “God clothes us” | |
| 498 | 2CO | 5 | 3 | ap7v | figs-activepassive | οὐ…εὑρεθησόμεθα | 1 | we will not be found to be naked | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **naked** rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **found**. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 499 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | zvz8 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ γὰρ | 1 | Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 500 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | bz6k | figs-exmetaphor | οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει…οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι | 1 | while we are in this tent | Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:1–3](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 501 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | e34b | figs-metaphor | βαρούμενοι | 1 | in this tent, we groan | Here Paul speaks as if he and those with were carrying a heavy “burden.” He means that something is making their lives difficult. The “burden” could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, fall apart and die. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 502 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | g9yu | figs-activepassive | βαρούμενοι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 503 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | f8rb | figs-activepassive | οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι | 1 | We do not want to be unclothed … we want to be clothed | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 504 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | nezo | figs-ellipsis | ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι | 1 | This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 505 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | n78p | figs-nominaladj | τὸ θνητὸν | 1 | to be unclothed | Paul is using the adjective **mortal** as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are **mortal**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) |
| 506 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | uiei | translate-unknown | τὸ θνητὸν | 1 | Here, the word **mortal** identifies something that will die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes things that die. Alternate translation: “what will die” or “things liable to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 507 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | e5zi | figs-activepassive | καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς | 1 | so that what is mortal may be swallowed up by life | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “life may swallow up the mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 508 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | de2b | figs-metaphor | καταποθῇ | 1 | so that what is mortal may be swallowed up by life | Here Paul refers to **the mortal** as if it were food that could be **swallowed up**. This illustrates that **the mortal** has been defeated as surely as if **life** devoured it as food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “may be destroyed” or “may be taken over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 509 | 2CO | 5 | 4 | y0db | figs-abstractnouns | τῆς ζωῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live” or an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “what is alive” or “what lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 510 | 2CO | 5 | 5 | x35l | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 511 | 2CO | 5 | 5 | m2id | figs-explicit | κατεργασάμενος ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, the phrase **having prepared** could refer to how God: (1) has acted in believers’ lives to get them ready for resurrection and new life. Alternate translation: “having gotten us ready” (2) created believers when they first began to live. Alternate translation: “having created” or “having made us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 512 | 2CO | 5 | 5 | xr9o | writing-pronouns | αὐτὸ τοῦτο | 1 | Here, the phrase **this very {thing}** refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about receiving a new body in place of the one that people have now (see [5:4](../05/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the phrase refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “receiving resurrection bodies” or “this new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 513 | 2CO | 5 | 5 | n20x | figs-distinguish | ὁ δοὺς | 1 | Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 514 | 2CO | 5 | 5 | g7yj | figs-metaphor | τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | who gave us the Spirit as the down payment | Here, Paul is speaking of the **Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 515 | 2CO | 5 | 5 | kyyw | figs-possession | τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to the **down payment** as the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 516 | 2CO | 5 | 6 | clh5 | grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:1–6](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 517 | 2CO | 5 | 6 | xjg3 | καὶ εἰδότες | 1 | Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know” | ||
| 518 | 2CO | 5 | 6 | bde4 | figs-infostructure | θαρροῦντες…πάντοτε, καὶ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου; | 1 | Paul never gives a main verb to go with these statements. Instead, he introduces a parenthetical statement in the following verse and then ends the sentence. At the beginning of [5:8](../05/08.md), he repeats the word that is translated **courageous** here, which indicates that he is going to resume speaking about what he started speaking about in this verse. If you can clearly indicate that Paul does not finish this sentence, you could use that form here, as the ULT does by using a dash. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could make this verse a complete thought on its own. Alternate translation: “we are always courageous and know that being at home in the body, we are away from the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 519 | 2CO | 5 | 6 | xv3m | figs-exmetaphor | ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου | 1 | being at home in the body | Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building that a person could be **at home in**. Express the idea as you did in [5:1–2](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “living in the body, as if it were a home, we are not present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 520 | 2CO | 5 | 6 | ebl4 | figs-explicit | ἐν τῷ σώματι | 1 | we are away from the Lord | Paul implies that this **body** is the one that people have before they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “in our current body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 521 | 2CO | 5 | 7 | w885 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation of what it means to be “away from the Lord” (see [5:6](../05/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “that means that” or “thus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 522 | 2CO | 5 | 7 | rfn4 | figs-metaphor | περιπατοῦμεν | 1 | we walk by faith, not by sight | Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were “walking.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with plain language. Alternate translation: “we act” or “we live our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 523 | 2CO | 5 | 7 | wok7 | figs-abstractnouns | διὰ πίστεως…οὐ διὰ εἴδους | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **sight**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “see.” Alternate translation: “by believing, not by seeing” or “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 524 | 2CO | 5 | 7 | n9el | figs-explicit | διὰ πίστεως…οὐ διὰ εἴδους | 1 | Here, the words **faith** and **sight** could refer to: (1) the acts of “believing” or “seeing” Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus, not by seeing him” (2) what is “believed” or “seen.” Alternate translation: “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 525 | 2CO | 5 | 8 | iq0j | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces again what Paul started speaking about in [5:16(../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes an earlier idea or thought. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 526 | 2CO | 5 | 8 | npio | καὶ | 1 | Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are **confident**. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are **confident** about. Alternate translation: “enough that we” | ||
| 527 | 2CO | 5 | 8 | a6au | εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον | 1 | we would rather be away from the body | Alternate translation: “would prefer” | |
| 528 | 2CO | 5 | 8 | i3m3 | figs-exmetaphor | ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον | 1 | at home with the Lord | Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home and to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) |
| 529 | 2CO | 5 | 8 | bca2 | figs-explicit | ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος | 1 | Here, the word **body** refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase **be away from the body** could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still **with the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 530 | 2CO | 5 | 9 | owmc | grammar-connect-logic-result | διὸ καὶ | 1 | Here, the phrase **And therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 531 | 2CO | 5 | 9 | ejd1 | translate-unknown | φιλοτιμούμεθα | 1 | Here, the word **aspire** refers to earnestly desiring or seeking after something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses a strong desire or goal. Alternate translation: “we earnestly seek” or “we greatly desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 532 | 2CO | 5 | 9 | ml5j | figs-explicit | εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες | 1 | whether we are at home or away | Here Paul could be referring to how people are **at home** or **away** from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 533 | 2CO | 5 | 9 | gadz | figs-exmetaphor | εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες | 1 | Here Paul continues to refer a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md), [8](../05/08.md). Make sure that your translation matches fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])\n | |
| 534 | 2CO | 5 | 9 | j1sl | writing-pronouns | αὐτῷ | 1 | to be pleasing to him | Here, the word **him** refers to the “Lord” whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse, that is, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 535 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | k0qb | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 536 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | awq4 | figs-exclusive | τοὺς…πάντας ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 537 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | uv7o | figs-activepassive | τοὺς…πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we “reveal” ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God “reveals” us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 538 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | kdf2 | figs-explicit | ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | before the judgment seat of Christ | Here, the phrase **judgment seat** refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will “judge” **us all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how **Christ** will “judge.” Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 539 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | c499 | figs-metaphor | κομίσηται…τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος | 1 | each one may receive back the things done in | In this context, the phrase **receive back** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul is speaking as if everyone **will receive back** as payment or recompense exactly what they did **through the body**. By this, Paul means that God will reward or punish everyone in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “may receive a punishment or reward that fits what they did through the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 540 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | v8sl | figs-activepassive | τὰ | 1 | the things done in the body | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **each one** did it. Alternate translation: “what he or she has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 541 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | cr07 | figs-idiom | διὰ τοῦ σώματος | 1 | Here, the phrase **through the body** clarifies that **the {things done}** are what people did while they had mortal bodies and lived on this earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what people do in their current bodies. Alternate translation: “with their earthly bodies” or “before they died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 542 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | nhwf | figs-explicit | πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν | 1 | Here, the phrase **with regard to what {things} he did** introduces what **Christ** is judging. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the basis of what things he did” or “being judged based on what he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 543 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | izpv | figs-gendernotations | ἔπραξεν | 1 | Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she did” or “that person did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 544 | 2CO | 5 | 10 | lsh8 | figs-explicit | εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν | 1 | whether for good or for bad | Here, the words **good** or **bad** could describe: (1) the things that people did. Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” (2) both the things that people did and what they **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether good things deserving commendation or bad things deserving rebuke” (3) just what people **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether reward or rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 545 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | hszo | grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:10](../05/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 546 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | dzh5 | grammar-connect-logic-result | εἰδότες | 1 | knowing the fear of the Lord | Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for why Paul and those with him **persuade men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 547 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | pa4j | figs-possession | τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to the Lord” or “the fear that we experience for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 548 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | e0c9 | figs-abstractnouns | τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **fear**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “how we fear the Lord” or “what it is to fear the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 549 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | qm34 | figs-explicit | ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν | 1 | we persuade people | Here Paul could be implying that he “persuades” people: (1) to know **the fear of the Lord** as he and those with him do. Alternate translation: “we persuade men also to know the fear of the Lord” (2) to realize that he and those with him are people who know **the fear of the Lord** and are thus trustworthy. Alternate translation: “we persuade men that we are those who fear the Lord” or “we persuade men that we are trustworthy” (3) to accept the gospel. Alternate translation: “we persuade men to believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 550 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | b7dd | grammar-connect-logic-contrast | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how they **persuade men**. In contrast with that, they do not need to persuade God, since they are already **clearly known** by him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) | |
| 551 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | v11v | figs-activepassive | Θεῷ…πεφανερώμεθα…πεφανερῶσθαι | 1 | What we are is clearly seen by God | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God knows us clearly … that you know us clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 552 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | qb7z | figs-explicit | πεφανερώμεθα…ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι | 1 | Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. Paul implies that **God** knows that they are faithful to him and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 553 | 2CO | 5 | 11 | y5l1 | figs-idiom | ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν | 1 | that it is also clear to your conscience | Here, the word **consciences** identifies the parts of people that can identify and recognize what is right and wrong. Paul refers to the **consciences** here because he wants the Corinthians to think about whether Paul and those with him are truly trustworthy or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the part of the person that decides what is right and wrong, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “in your hearts” or “by you as consider us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 554 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | r7sg | figs-infostructure | οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ | 1 | If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])\n | |
| 555 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | yk4m | translate-unknown | οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν | 1 | Here, phrase **commending ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “We are not again speaking favorably of ourselves” or “We are not again vouching for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 556 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | ufwe | figs-explicit | πάλιν | 1 | Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 557 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | m6sy | figs-abstractnouns | ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opportunity**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “enable” or “equip.” Alternate translation: “are equipping you for boasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 558 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | c134 | figs-possession | ἀφορμὴν…καυχήματος | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 559 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | mza1 | figs-abstractnouns | ἔχητε πρὸς | 1 | so you may have an answer | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **answer**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “answer” or “respond.” Alternate translation: “you may be able to answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 560 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | e6k6 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν προσώπῳ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **appearance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “what people look like” or “how things appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 561 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | ikd5 | figs-ellipsis | μὴ ἐν | 1 | This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 562 | 2CO | 5 | 12 | it2r | figs-metonymy | ἐν καρδίᾳ | 1 | those who boast about appearances but not about what is in the heart | In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in mind” or “in who they really are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 563 | 2CO | 5 | 13 | ys3l | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said “boasting” in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 564 | 2CO | 5 | 13 | e4mp | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἴτε | -1 | Here, the word **if** in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks has happened. He is not using **if** to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 565 | 2CO | 5 | 13 | cy57 | figs-idiom | ἐξέστημεν…σωφρονοῦμεν | 1 | if we are out of our minds … if we are in our right minds | Here Paul uses two opposite phrases. These phrases could contrast: (1) fanatical or extreme behavior with moderate or sane behavior. Alternate translation: “we are fanatical … we are moderate” (2) ecstatic or visionary behavior with rational or normal behavior. Alternate translation: “we see visions … we have control of our minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 566 | 2CO | 5 | 13 | b4ri | figs-explicit | Θεῷ…ὑμῖν | 1 | Here, the phrases **for God** and **for you** could indicate: (1) the people for whose benefit Paul is behaving in these ways. Alternate translation: “it is for God’s sake … it is for your sake” (2) the people to whom he directs his behavior. Alternate translation: “it is in our relationship with God … it is in our relationship with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 567 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | a5w7 | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul acts in the ways that he does (see [5:13](../05/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “We do those things because” or “We act in those ways because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 568 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | azi9 | figs-possession | ἡ…ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | the love of Christ | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **love** that could be: (1) **love** that **Christ** has for Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “the love Christ has for us” (2) **love** that Paul and those with him have for **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the love we have for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 569 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | gjmd | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ…ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note about whose **love** this is. Alternate translation: “how Christ loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 570 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | y3hj | translate-unknown | συνέχει | 1 | Here, the word **controls** refers to how something forces or directs a person to act in a certain way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “constrains” or “compels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 571 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | l1y6 | κρίναντας | 1 | Here, the phrase **having judged** could introduce: (1) what he and those with him think about how **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “and we have judged” or “as we judge” (2) a reason why **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “because we have judged” | ||
| 572 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | ig7l | writing-pronouns | τοῦτο, ὅτι | 1 | Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul is about to say, what he introduces with the word **that**. This form was powerful in his culture. If it would not be powerful in your culture, and if your readers might find both **this** and **that** confusing, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “that” or “what follows:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 573 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | nd9g | figs-nominaladj | εἷς | 1 | died for all | Paul is using the adjective **one** as a noun in order to refer to **Christ**, who is **one** person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase, and you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “one human” or “one human, Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) |
| 574 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | crsa | figs-explicit | ὑπὲρ | 1 | Here, the phrase **for the sake of** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save” or “for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of” or “instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 575 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | trmb | figs-nominaladj | πάντων…οἱ πάντες | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans … all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 576 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | ocra | figs-extrainfo | πάντων…οἱ πάντες | 1 | Here, the word **all** could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Since Paul did not clarify which he meant, if possible you also should use a general word that could be interpreted in either way. Alternate translation: “everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 577 | 2CO | 5 | 14 | nezi | figs-metaphor | οἱ πάντες ἀπέθανον | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if **all died** because or when Jesus **died**. Since the following verse states that some people are still “living,” he cannot mean that every person has physically **died**. He may mean that people have **died** to sin, or that they participated in how Christ **died**, or that who they used to be **died**. Since some or all of these interpretations are possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in a form that could allow for several of these interpretations, such as in simile form. Alternate translation: “in a way, all died” or “all died in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 578 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | h831 | figs-explicit | ὑπὲρ | -1 | him who for their sake died and was raised | Here, much like in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **for** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save … to save” or “for the benefit of … for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of … in place of” or “instead of … instead of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 579 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | b5d1 | figs-nominaladj | πάντων | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 580 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | rbbw | figs-extrainfo | πάντων | 1 | Here, just as in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **all** could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Express the idea as you did in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) | |
| 581 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | s4yr | figs-explicit | οἱ ζῶντες | 1 | Here, the phrase **the ones living** could identify people who: (1) have spiritual life, that is, those who have received new life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones having new life” (2) have physical life, that is, who have not died. Alternate translation: “those who are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 582 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | bc7p | figs-idiom | μηκέτι ἑαυτοῖς ζῶσιν, ἀλλὰ τῷ | 1 | Here, to **live for** a person refers to acting in a way that pleases or fulfills that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “should live no longer to please themselves, but to please the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 583 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | g9k4 | figs-ellipsis | ἀλλὰ τῷ | 1 | This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but they should live for the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) | |
| 584 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | ri6f | writing-pronouns | τῷ | 1 | for them | Here, the word **one** refers to the same person that **he** refers to at the beginning of the verse: Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 585 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | h52q | figs-idiom | ἐγερθέντι | 1 | Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 586 | 2CO | 5 | 15 | aovc | figs-activepassive | αὐτῶν…καὶ ἐγερθέντι | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “them, the one whom God raised” or “them, whom God raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 587 | 2CO | 5 | 16 | ic21 | grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | For this reason | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference conclusion from what Paul has said, especially referring back to [5:14–15](../05/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from previous claims. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 588 | 2CO | 5 | 16 | f2ww | figs-explicit | ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν…νῦν | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when **we** believed. Alternate translation: “starting when we believed, … since then” (2) the time in which Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “from the present moment on … right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 589 | 2CO | 5 | 16 | efn1 | figs-idiom | ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν | 1 | Here, the phrase **from now on** refers to a specific moment in time (**now**) and the all time that follows that moment (**on**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “starting right now,” or “now and in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 590 | 2CO | 5 | 16 | t1cc | figs-idiom | κατὰ σάρκα | -1 | Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions … according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value … according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 591 | 2CO | 5 | 16 | y8mk | grammar-connect-condition-fact | εἰ καὶ | -1 | Paul is speaking as **if** it were a possibility that **we regarded Christ according to the flesh** in the past, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word or phrase such as “although” or “despite the fact that.” Alternate translation: “Even though” or “Despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) | |
| 592 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | yx28 | grammar-connect-logic-result | ὥστε | 1 | Here, the word **Therefore** could introduce an inference from: (1) [5:16](../05/16.md). In this case, Paul is saying that “regarding” Christ in a new ways indicates that a person is also a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Regarding Christ in this new way shows that” (2) [5:14–15](../05/14.md). In this case, Paul is saying that how Christ died for people causes them to be a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Because Christ died for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 593 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | khzj | grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical | εἴ | 1 | Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that being **in Christ** leads to being **a new creation**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “supposing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) | |
| 594 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | wark | figs-metaphor | ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that a person believes in Christ and is a Christian. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the person is a Christian, someone who is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “is a Christian” or “is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 595 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | af1b | figs-gendernotations | καινὴ κτίσις | 1 | Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” or “he or she is a new creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) | |
| 596 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | tl3h | figs-ellipsis | καινὴ κτίσις | 1 | he is a new creation | Here Paul does not directly what state what is **a new creation**. He could be implying that: (1) the person **in Christ** is a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a **new creation**, and the person can experience that when he or she is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 597 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | rt67 | figs-abstractnouns | καινὴ κτίσις | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “create.” Paul could be focusing on: (1) what is created. Alternate translation: “he is something that God has newly created” (2) the act of creating. Alternate translation: “God has newly created him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 598 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | ue8f | figs-explicit | τὰ ἀρχαῖα…καινά | 1 | The old things have passed away | Here, the phrases **old things** and **new things** could refer to: (1) things that characterize a person and their life. Alternate translation: “The things of the old life … things of the new life” (2) the world and how a person experiences it. Alternate translation: “The things of the old world … things of the new world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 599 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | vpe3 | figs-exclamations | ἰδοὺ | 1 | See | Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen up” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) |
| 600 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | d7i9 | γέγονεν καινά | 1 | Here, the phrase **new things** could be: (1) the subject of **have come**. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of **have come**, and the subject is the person who is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “he has become new” | ||
| 601 | 2CO | 5 | 17 | izkz | translate-textvariants | γέγονεν καινά | 1 | Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) | |
| 602 | 2CO | 5 | 18 | whyb | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 603 | 2CO | 5 | 18 | jyf7 | figs-explicit | τὰ…πάντα | 1 | All these things | Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in [5:17](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 604 | 2CO | 5 | 18 | s1q2 | figs-distinguish | τοῦ καταλλάξαντος | 1 | Here Paul adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) | |
| 605 | 2CO | 5 | 18 | u66s | figs-possession | τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a **ministry** whose goal or aim is **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 606 | 2CO | 5 | 18 | lj2h | figs-abstractnouns | δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς | 1 | the ministry of reconciliation | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **ministry** and **reconciliation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “minister” and “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 607 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | o5j8 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | ὡς ὅτι | 1 | Here, the phrase **namely, that** introduces more information about the “ministry of this reconciliation” that Paul mentioned in [5:18](../05/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information or further explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, that” or “and by this I mean that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 608 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | payo | figs-infostructure | Θεὸς ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ…καταλλάσσων | 1 | Here, **in Christ** could modify: (1) **reconciling**, so that God **was reconciling** by means of or through **Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about how **God** accomplishes the reconciliation. Alternate translation: “in Christ God was reconciling” (2) **was**, so that God was **in Christ**, and he was **reconciling** while he was acting **in Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about the relationship between **Christ** and **God**, namely that **Christ** is **God**. Alternate translation: “God was in Christ, reconciling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 609 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | sfrj | figs-metaphor | Θεὸς…ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains the means by which God accomplishes the “reconciliation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that God “reconciles” people by uniting them to Christ. Alternate translation: “God, by uniting people to Christ,” or “God by means of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 610 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | w1d1 | figs-metonymy | κόσμον | 1 | in Christ God is reconciling the world to himself | Here, the word **world** could refer to: (1) the people in the **world**. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the **world** as a whole, including people, places, and things. Alternate translation: “everything he created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 611 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | joj6 | figs-infostructure | μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, καὶ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς | 1 | Here Paul may have intended that: (1) **not counting** and **having placed** both introduce ways that God **was reconciling**. Alternate translation: “and he did that by not counting their trespasses against them and by placing in us the word of reconciliation” (2) **not counting** further defines **reconciling**, and **having placed** introduces an action parallel to **reconciling**. Alternate translation: “that is, not counting their trespasses against them, and he was placing in us the word or reconciliation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 612 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | mckq | figs-idiom | μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if God could keep a “count” of people’s **trespasses**, which means that he would keep track of everything that a person did wrong in order to condemn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to keeping track of or condemning people for what they have done wrong. Alternate translation: “not keeping track of their trespasses” or “not using their trespasses to condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 613 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | a1io | writing-pronouns | αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν | 1 | Here, the words **their** and **them** refers to the people who live in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “the trespasses of the people in the world … them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) | |
| 614 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | bpnh | figs-abstractnouns | τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **trespasses**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “transgress.” Alternate translation: “how they transgressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 615 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | b62q | figs-metaphor | θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν | 1 | He is entrusting to us the message of reconciliation | Here Paul speaks as if **the word of reconciliation** were an object that God would “place in” Paul and those with him. He means that God has called or commissioned them to proclaim this **word of reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having given to us” or “having called us to proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 616 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | om5s | figs-metonymy | τὸν λόγον | 1 | Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 617 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | ix97 | figs-possession | τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς | 1 | the message of reconciliation | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** about **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word about reconciliation” or “the word concerning reconciliation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 618 | 2CO | 5 | 19 | zuoe | figs-abstractnouns | τῆς καταλλαγῆς | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “about how God reconciles the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 619 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | wg8f | grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Therefore, we are ambassadors for Christ | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul said in the previous verse about how God “placed in us the word of reconciliation” (see [5:19](../05/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 620 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | q9u9 | ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ | -1 | representatives of Christ | Here, the phrase **on behalf of** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him represent **Christ**. Alternate translation: “who act for Christ … as those who act for Christ” (2) Paul and those with him act for the benefit of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ … for the sake of Christ” | |
| 621 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | uqy7 | ὡς | 1 | Here, the phrase **as though** introduces the implication or meaning of being **ambassadors on behalf of Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an implication or explanation. Alternate translation: “and so” or “which means that” | ||
| 622 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | lr70 | figs-infostructure | παρακαλοῦντος δι’ ἡμῶν; δεόμεθα ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Here, the clause **We implore {you} on behalf of Christ** could be: (1) the introduction to what Paul and those with him say as God **is appealing** through them. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us as we implore you on behalf of Christ, ‘Be reconciled to God!’” (2) part of what **God is appealing through us**. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us when we say, ‘We implore you on behalf Christ: be reconciled to God!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 623 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | me5z | figs-explicit | παρακαλοῦντος | 1 | Here Paul does not state to whom **God is appealing**. He could imply that he **is appealing** to: (1) everyone. Alternate translation: “is appealing to all people” (2) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “is appealing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 624 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | eoef | figs-explicit | δεόμεθα | 1 | Here what Paul says could be addressed to: (1) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “We implore you Corinthians on behalf of Christ” (2) every person with whom Paul and those with him speak. Alternate translation: “We implore everyone we meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 625 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | t7be | figs-quotations | Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “Christ that you should be reconciled to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 626 | 2CO | 5 | 20 | a6fx | figs-activepassive | καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | Be reconciled to God | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Corinthians do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Reconcile yourselves with God” (2) God does it. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 627 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | jp2a | writing-pronouns | τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν…ἐποίησεν…ἐν αὐτῷ | 1 | The one who did not know sin, he made sin for us | Here, the words **one** and **him** refer to Jesus the Messiah. The word **he** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who did not know sin, God made … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 628 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | qim8 | figs-idiom | τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν | 1 | Here, the phrase **having known sin** refers to committing or doing **sin**. It does not refer just to knowing about **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to committing **sin**. Alternate translation: “The one not having done sin” or “The one not having sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 629 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | oxvb | figs-metaphor | ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if God **made** Jesus **sin**. He could mean that God: (1) treated Jesus like he was a sinner. Alternate translation: “he regarded as a sinner” (2) identified Jesus with sinners and sin. Alternate translation: “he made like a sinner” (3) caused Jesus to be a sin offering. Alternate translation: “he made a sin offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 630 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | dmjk | figs-explicit | ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the phrase **for us** could indicate that God made Jesus **sin**: (1) to benefit or help **us**. Alternate translation: “for our sake” or “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of **us**. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 631 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | pix7 | figs-metaphor | ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if people could become **the righteousness of God**. He could mean that **we**: (1) share the **righteousness** that God gives to those who believe. Alternate translation: “we might share in the righteousness of God” (2) are declared “righteous” by God. Alternate translation: “we might be declared to have the righteousness of God” (3) become those who live “righteously.” Alternate translation: “we might act according to the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 632 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | kmt9 | figs-possession | δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ | 1 | so that we might become the righteousness of God in him | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 633 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | ebz2 | figs-abstractnouns | ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ | 1 | The one who did not know sin | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what **righteousness of God** means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 634 | 2CO | 5 | 21 | cypg | figs-metaphor | ἐν αὐτῷ | 1 | Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 635 | 2CO | 6 | intro | f5qu | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and those with him “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and those with him do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and with him “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that “righteousness”: (1) is the “weapons” (2) is defended by the “weapons” (3) characterizes the “weapons.” Also the idea that the “weapons” are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and those with him can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these “weapons,” but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### “Opening” the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about “opening” the heart and, in contrast, being “restricted.” He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an “open” heart and failing to love other people as it were a “restriction” in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are “the temple of the living God.” In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options. \n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and those with him commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences. \n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and those with him, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |||
| 636 | 2CO | 6 | 1 | kf1d | grammar-connect-words-phrases | δὲ | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) |
| 637 | 2CO | 6 | 1 | tbr6 | figs-explicit | συνεργοῦντες | 1 | Working together | Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones ho is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 638 | 2CO | 6 | 1 | x4hc | figs-exclusive | καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν | 1 | Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) | |
| 639 | 2CO | 6 | 1 | s8db | figs-doublenegatives | καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς | 1 | we also urge you not to receive the grace of God in vain | Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) |
| 640 | 2CO | 6 | 1 | wdla | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gracious**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 641 | 2CO | 6 | 1 | pdgo | figs-idiom | εἰς κενὸν | 1 | Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, receiving **the grace of God** will not lead to salvation if the Corinthians do not persevere in living as those who have received **the grace of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 642 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | ooms | grammar-connect-logic-result | γάρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 643 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | u9kc | writing-quotations | λέγει | 1 | For he says | Here, the phrase **he says** introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of [Isaiah 49:8](../isa/49/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) |
| 644 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | uqu5 | figs-quotations | λέγει…καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. | 1 | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he says that at an acceptable time he listened to you, and in a day of salvation he helped you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 645 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | pp3i | figs-parallelism | καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας | 1 | The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) | |
| 646 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | kilf | figs-idiom | καιρῷ δεκτῷ | 1 | Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 647 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | iz3h | figs-explicit | ἐπήκουσά σου | 1 | Here, the word **listened** indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just “listen” but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 648 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | be7i | figs-yousingular | σου…σοι | 1 | Because God is speaking to one person, his special servant, **you** in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) | |
| 649 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | z6w6 | figs-idiom | ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας | 1 | Here, the phrase **day of salvation** refers to the time when God will bring **salvation** for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for this idea. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 650 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | qrdt | figs-abstractnouns | σωτηρίας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 651 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | sa94 | figs-exclamations | ἰδοὺ, νῦν | -1 | Look | Here, the words **Behold** and **Look** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) |
| 652 | 2CO | 6 | 2 | j4k4 | καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος…ἡμέρα σωτηρίας | 1 | Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although if possible use a word for “good” **time** instead of just **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation” | ||
| 653 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | shtt | figs-infostructure | διδόντες | 1 | Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and those with him serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 654 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | v3wc | figs-idiom | μηδεμίαν…διδόντες προσκοπήν | 1 | We do not place a stumbling block in front of anyone | Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that could cause offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 655 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | c9kr | figs-abstractnouns | προσκοπήν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “offend” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “cause to be offended” or “reason to be upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 656 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | sv9d | figs-explicit | ἐν μηδενὶ | 1 | Here, the phrase **in anything** could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 657 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | he3c | figs-activepassive | μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία | 1 | our ministry might not | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 658 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | fkf9 | figs-abstractnouns | ἡ διακονία | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **ministry**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “minister.” Alternate translation: “how we minister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 659 | 2CO | 6 | 3 | winz | translate-unknown | μὴ μωμηθῇ | 1 | Here, the word **blamed** refers to how people criticize something or find fault with it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “might not be critiqued” or “might not be condemned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 660 | 2CO | 6 | 4 | xd9l | translate-unknown | συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς | 1 | General Information: | Here, the phrase **commend ourselves** refers to the practice of stating why one should be trusted and welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to giving reasons why people should welcome and trust a person. Alternate translation: “we present ourselves favorably” or “we vouch for ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) |
| 661 | 2CO | 6 | 4 | p6pl | figs-explicit | ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι | 1 | Here the word **as** could introduce: (1) who they are (**servants of God**) while they **commend** themselves. Alternate translation: “we who are servants of God commend ourselves in everything” (2) what it is that they must **commend** themselves to be. Alternate translation: “we commend ourselves in everything, proving that we are servants of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 662 | 2CO | 6 | 4 | p9up | figs-possession | Θεοῦ διάκονοι | 1 | we commend ourselves in everything as God’s servants | Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer **servants** who serve **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “servants for God” or “God’s servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 663 | 2CO | 6 | 4 | faw1 | figs-infostructure | Θεοῦ…ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν | 1 | Here, the phrase **in much endurance** could go with: (1) the list that follows. In this case, the list gives the situation in which they have **much endurance**. Alternate translation: “of God; we have much endurance in” (2) **we commend ourselves**. In this case, the phrase gives an explanation for how they **commend** themselves, and the list gives the situations in which this occurs Alternate translation: “of God by having much endurance; we show this in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 664 | 2CO | 6 | 4 | xyf9 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις | 1 | God’s servants; in much endurance, affliction, distress, hardship | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **endurance,** **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “enduring at all times while we are persecuted, pressured, and distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 665 | 2CO | 6 | 4 | ndmv | figs-doublet | ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις | 1 | Here, the words **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses** function together to refer to many different kinds of persecution and suffering. It is possible that **tribulations** refers to direct persecution, **hardships** refers to being forced to do something difficult, and **distresses** refers to being unable to do what one wants. If you do not have three words for these categories, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one or two words or phrases to refer to suffering and persecution. Alternate translation: “in persecutions, in suffering” or “in every tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) | |
| 666 | 2CO | 6 | 5 | ded3 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν πληγαῖς, ἐν φυλακαῖς, ἐν ἀκαταστασίαις, ἐν κόποις, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις, ἐν νηστείαις | 1 | If your language does not express some of these ideas with nouns, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in being beaten, in being imprisoned, in being mobbed, in working hard, in sleeping little, in being hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 667 | 2CO | 6 | 5 | r2fj | translate-unknown | πληγαῖς | 1 | Here, the word **beatings** refers to when a person strikes another person multiple times, usually with a stick or rope. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of action. Alternate translation: “whippings” or “floggings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 668 | 2CO | 6 | 5 | onzg | translate-unknown | ἀκαταστασίαις | 1 | Here, the word **riots** refers to how a large of people become upset about something and as a group hurt people and property. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this behavior. Alternate translation: “dangerous mobs” or “violent disturbances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 669 | 2CO | 6 | 5 | t43d | translate-unknown | ἀγρυπνίαις | 1 | Here, the word **sleeplessness** refers to not getting any or enough sleep. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “sleep deprivation” or “a lack of sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 670 | 2CO | 6 | 6 | w84c | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν ἁγνότητι, ἐν γνώσει, ἐν μακροθυμίᾳ, ἐν χρηστότητι, ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἐν ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ | 1 | in purity … in genuine love | If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or adjectives. Alternate translation: “we are pure, knowledgeable, patient, kind, filled with the Holy Spirit, sincerely loving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 671 | 2CO | 6 | 6 | k3c5 | translate-unknown | ἁγνότητι | 1 | Here, the word **purity** refers to a state that is not qualified by evil or shameful things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a lack of these things. Alternate translation: “virtue” or “innocence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 672 | 2CO | 6 | 6 | e2lc | ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ | 1 | Here, the phrase **in the Holy Spirit** could refer to: (1) having the power or help of the **Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “in the power of the Holy Spirit” (2) being “holy” in one’s “spirit.” Alternate translation: “in holiness of spirit” | ||
| 673 | 2CO | 6 | 6 | mwzw | translate-unknown | ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ | 1 | Here, the word **sincere** indicates that the **love** is focused only on loving others and not on what one might gain from loving others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clear. Alternate translation: “love that is not hypocritical” or “love with pure motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) | |
| 674 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | b6am | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας, ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ | 1 | in the word of truth, in the power of God | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **truth** and **power**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in the word about what is true, in God empowering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 675 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | cr55 | figs-metonymy | λόγῳ | 1 | Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 676 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | dui6 | figs-possession | ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας | 1 | in the word of truth | Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a **word** about the **truth**. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 677 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | p5l5 | figs-possession | ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ | 1 | in the power of God | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 678 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | ef5b | figs-metaphor | διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν | 1 | the weapons of righteousness | Here speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and those with him live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 679 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | gg43 | figs-possession | τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης | 1 | Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) | |
| 680 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | ozxm | figs-abstractnouns | τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 681 | 2CO | 6 | 7 | ijr2 | figs-explicit | τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν | 1 | for the right hand and for the left | Here, having **weapons** for **the right hand and the left** could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from **right** and **left**. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 682 | 2CO | 6 | 8 | ftu0 | figs-explicit | διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας | 1 | In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and those with him persevere in serving God whether people think and say good or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 683 | 2CO | 6 | 8 | m51w | figs-abstractnouns | δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 684 | 2CO | 6 | 8 | fedq | figs-explicit | ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς | 1 | Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 685 | 2CO | 6 | 8 | e4pf | figs-nominaladj | ἀληθεῖς | 1 | as imposters | Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and those with him as those who “truly” are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) |
| 686 | 2CO | 6 | 9 | niij | figs-explicit | ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι | 1 | Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or “but” to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 687 | 2CO | 6 | 9 | fcb5 | figs-activepassive | ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι | 1 | as if we were unknown and we are still well known | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) **unknown** to many people but **known** to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) **unknown** to some people, but **known** to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 688 | 2CO | 6 | 9 | x7bu | figs-exclamations | καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν | 1 | Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “yet, and listen to this, living” or “yet most certainly living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) | |
| 689 | 2CO | 6 | 9 | r1d9 | figs-activepassive | ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι | 1 | as being punished, and yet not being killed | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that: (1) God does them. Alternate translation: “God disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (2) other people do them. Alternate translation: “people disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n |
| 690 | 2CO | 6 | 9 | nqcv | figs-abstractnouns | μὴ θανατούμενοι | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die” or “kill.” Alternate translation: “yet not being killed” or “not dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 691 | 2CO | 6 | 10 | so04 | figs-explicit | ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες | 1 | Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and those with him and then **yet** or **but** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 692 | 2CO | 6 | 10 | vydj | figs-metaphor | πολλοὺς…πλουτίζοντες | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him made other people **rich**. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually **rich**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 693 | 2CO | 6 | 10 | pajk | figs-nominaladj | πολλοὺς | 1 | Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) | |
| 694 | 2CO | 6 | 10 | fpqg | figs-explicit | πάντα | 1 | Here Paul could be stating that they “possess”: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and those with him also “possess” everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 695 | 2CO | 6 | 11 | mv85 | figs-activepassive | τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται | 1 | our heart is opened wide | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and those with him did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 696 | 2CO | 6 | 11 | v74j | grammar-collectivenouns | τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν…ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν | 1 | Our mouth has been opened to you | Here Paul is speaking of all of their “mouths” and “hearts,” not of one particular **mouth** or **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to “mouths” and “hearts” in general. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) |
| 697 | 2CO | 6 | 11 | r815 | figs-metonymy | τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν…ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν | 1 | Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 698 | 2CO | 6 | 11 | jvak | figs-metaphor | τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here Paul speaks as he and those with had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and those with him have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and those with him have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you ” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 699 | 2CO | 6 | 11 | w42w | figs-metaphor | ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if he and those with him have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 700 | 2CO | 6 | 12 | m2kq | figs-metaphor | οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν | 1 | Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 701 | 2CO | 6 | 12 | u4fz | figs-activepassive | οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν | 1 | You are not restrained by us | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 702 | 2CO | 6 | 12 | xv9t | translate-unknown | ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν | 1 | You are not restrained by us, but you are restrained in your affections | Here, the word **affections** refers to the insides of a person where that person feels emotions, particularly emotions related to compassion and love. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these emotions or to the place where people feel these emotions. Alternate translation: “in your love” or “in your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) |
| 703 | 2CO | 6 | 12 | p88s | figs-abstractnouns | τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **affections**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 704 | 2CO | 6 | 13 | ypsz | figs-infostructure | τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς | 1 | Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) | |
| 705 | 2CO | 6 | 13 | b62y | figs-explicit | τὴν…αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν | 1 | Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and those with him have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by “opening themselves” to Paul and those with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being “exchanged” more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 706 | 2CO | 6 | 13 | zdfh | figs-simile | ὡς τέκνοις λέγω | 1 | Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) | |
| 707 | 2CO | 6 | 13 | c6vp | figs-metaphor | πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς | 1 | open yourselves wide also | Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 708 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | qd33 | figs-metaphor | μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις | 1 | be yoked together with | Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 709 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | x89j | figs-activepassive | μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες | 1 | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that people do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Do not yoke yourselves together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) | |
| 710 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | v7kk | grammar-connect-logic-result | γὰρ | 1 | Do not be yoked together with unbelievers | Here, the word **For** introduces a some reasons why the Corinthians should be **yoked** with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 711 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | v7pw | figs-rquestion | τίς…μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ, ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? | 1 | For what association does righteousness have with lawlessness? | Here Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “righteousness and lawlessness cannot have partnership! Nor can light and darkness have fellowship!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 712 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | n5so | figs-abstractnouns | τίς…μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **partnership**, **righteousness**, and **lawlessness**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “can righteous people and lawless people partner” or “can what is righteous partner with what is lawless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 713 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | xr52 | figs-abstractnouns | τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? | 1 | For what fellowship does light have with darkness? | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **fellowship**, **light**, and **darkness**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “can what is bright go together with what is dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 714 | 2CO | 6 | 14 | h9ks | figs-metaphor | τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? | 1 | Here Paul speaks about how **light** and **darkness** do not have **fellowship**. He could be speaking about: (1) things and people that are good (**light**) and things and people that are evil (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship do good people have with evil people” (2) God’s kingdom and people (**light**) and Satan’s kingdom and people (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship does God’s kingdom have with Satan’s kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 715 | 2CO | 6 | 15 | r1vq | figs-rquestion | τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ, ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου | 1 | What agreement can Christ have with Beliar? | Here, just as in [6:14](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “And Christ has no harmony with Beliar! Nor does a believer have a share with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 716 | 2CO | 6 | 15 | f832 | figs-abstractnouns | τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **harmony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree” or “go together.” Alternate translation: “And does Christ go together with Beliar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 717 | 2CO | 6 | 15 | rm3r | translate-names | Βελιάρ | 1 | Beliar | Here, the word **Beliar** is another name for the devil, who is also called Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote or short phrase that clarifies that **Beliar** is another name for Satan. Alternate translation: “Beliar, that is, Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) |
| 718 | 2CO | 6 | 15 | jdq6 | figs-abstractnouns | τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **share**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “what does a believer share with an unbeliever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 719 | 2CO | 6 | 15 | z9iv | figs-genericnoun | τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου | 1 | Or what share does a believer have together with an unbeliever? | Here Paul is speaking of “believers” and “unbelievers” in general, not of one particular **believer** and one particular **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to “believers” and “unbelievers” in general. Alternate translation: “what share does any believer have with any unbeliever” or “what share do believers have with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) |
| 720 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | y99x | figs-rquestion | τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων? | 1 | And what agreement is there between the temple of God and idols? | Here, just as in [6:14–15](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “And the temple of God has no agreement with idols!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 721 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | m658 | figs-abstractnouns | τίς…συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **agreement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “does the temple of God agree with idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 722 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | jc79 | grammar-connect-words-phrases | γὰρ | 1 | Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said about **the temple of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) | |
| 723 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | s3l8 | figs-exclusive | ἡμεῖς | 1 | we are the temple of the living God | Here, the word **we** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) |
| 724 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | aqql | figs-metaphor | ἡμεῖς…ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος | 1 | Here Paul speaks as if **we** were a **temple**. He explains this metaphor with the following quotation, which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the **temple** is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 725 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | oc16 | figs-idiom | Θεοῦ…ζῶντος | 2 | Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that God actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) | |
| 726 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | es7t | writing-quotations | καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς | 1 | Here, the phrase **just as God said** introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how **we are the temple of the living God**. The words Paul quotes could come from [Leviticus 26:12](../lev/26/12.md); [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md); and [Ezekiel 37:27](../ezk/37/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 727 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | l298 | figs-quotations | εἶπεν…ὅτι ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω, καὶ ἔσομαι αὐτῶν Θεός, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί μου λαός | 1 | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “said that he would dwell among them, and walk among them; and he would be their God, and they themselves would be his people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 728 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | u5g3 | figs-parallelism | ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω | 1 | I will dwell among them and walk among them. | These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) |
| 729 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | g0nl | figs-metaphor | ἐνπεριπατήσω | 1 | Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he was “walking” around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 730 | 2CO | 6 | 16 | vy1b | figs-rpronouns | αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί | 1 | Here, the word translated **themselves** switches focus from **God** to **they**. Consider using a natural way to switch the focus to **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is they who will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) | |
| 731 | 2CO | 6 | 17 | fe1z | writing-quotations | διὸ…λέγει Κύριος | 1 | General Information: | Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way that shows it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that … the Lord says {through the prophets}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) |
| 732 | 2CO | 6 | 17 | vkex | figs-quotations | διὸ ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε, λέγει Κύριος, καὶ ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε; κἀγὼ εἰσδέξομαι ὑμᾶς | 1 | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “Therefore the Lord says that you should come out from the midst of them, and be separate, and touch no unclean thing, and he will welcome you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 733 | 2CO | 6 | 17 | peek | figs-parallelism | ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε | 1 | Here, these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Come out from the midst of them; yes, be separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) | |
| 734 | 2CO | 6 | 17 | z5ld | writing-pronouns | αὐτῶν | 1 | be separate | Here, the word **them** refers to people who do not follow God and who do not trust the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers” or “of the people who do not follow God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) |
| 735 | 2CO | 6 | 17 | vfie | figs-metonymy | ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε | 1 | Here the author of the quotation uses the word **touch** to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by “touching” it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “interact with no unclean thing” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 736 | 2CO | 6 | 17 | jg48 | grammar-connect-logic-result | κἀγὼ | 1 | Here, the word **and** introduces what happens when people do what God commanded in the first part of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and then I” or “and when you do those things, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 737 | 2CO | 6 | 18 | ft65 | writing-quotations | καὶ | 1 | Here uses the word **And** to introduce another quote from the Old Testament, specifically from [2 Samuel 7:8](../2sa/07/08.md) and [2 Samuel 7:14](../2sa/07/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “Again, as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “Even more, as it is written,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) | |
| 738 | 2CO | 6 | 18 | o9h6 | figs-quotations | καὶ ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας, λέγει Κύριος Παντοκράτωρ. | 1 | If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you may need to introduce the quote more clearly and specify to whom **I** refers. Alternate translation: “And it is written that God will be to you as a Father, and you will be to him as sons and daughters, as the Lord Almighty says.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) | |
| 739 | 2CO | 6 | 18 | dks6 | figs-parallelism | ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας | 1 | These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will be to you as a Father; yes, you will be to me as sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) | |
| 740 | 2CO | 7 | intro | hg36 | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Clean and unclean<br><br>Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])<br><br>### Sadness and sorrow<br><br>The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.<br><br>### Original situation<br><br>This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |||
| 741 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | h5xv | grammar-connect-logic-result | οὖν | 1 | Beloved | Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he said in [6:16–18](../06/16.md) about being God’s temple and family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “On account of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) |
| 742 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | k46r | grammar-connect-logic-result | ἔχοντες | 1 | Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why believers should **cleanse** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) | |
| 743 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | tytd | figs-abstractnouns | ταύτας…ἔχοντες τὰς ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “having been promised these things” or “God having pledged these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 744 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | pw5n | figs-explicit | ταύτας…τὰς ἐπαγγελίας | 1 | Here Paul is referring to the **promises** from the Old Testament that he quoted in [6:16–18](../06/16.md), which indicate that believers are God’s people, that God will welcome them, and that they are God’s sons and daughters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly refers back to those **promises**. Alternate translation: “the promises that I have quoted” or “those promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 745 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | fv49 | figs-abstractnouns | παντὸς μολυσμοῦ σαρκὸς | 1 | let us cleanse ourselves | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **defilement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “defile” or “corrupt.” Alternate translation: “anything that corrupts flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 746 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | f00w | figs-explicit | σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος | 1 | Here Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to the outward part of people, particularly the body. He uses the word **spirit** to refer to the inward part of people, the part that thinks, feels, and makes decisions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to similar parts of the person. Alternate translation: “of body and soul” or “of the physical and the spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 747 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | turq | ἐπιτελοῦντες | 1 | Here, the word **perfecting** could introduce: (1) another thing that believers should do while they are “cleansing” themselves. Alternate translation: “and let us perfect” or “as we perfect” (2) the result of the “cleansing.” Alternate translation: “so that we perfect” (3) how they “cleanse” themselves. Alternate translation: “by perfecting” | ||
| 748 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | c2xf | figs-abstractnouns | ἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην | 1 | perfecting holiness | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **holiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “holy.” Alternate translation: “perfecting how holy we are” or “growing to be perfectly holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 749 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | pt41 | figs-possession | φόβῳ Θεοῦ | 1 | in the fear of God | Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural way. See how you translated the similar phrase “fear of the Lord” in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to God” or “the fear that we experience for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) |
| 750 | 2CO | 7 | 1 | xlet | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind fear, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “in how we fear God” or “through fearing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 751 | 2CO | 7 | 2 | c2yz | figs-metaphor | χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς | 1 | Here, just as in [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks of loving others as if it was about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show love for us” or “Make room in your hearts for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 752 | 2CO | 7 | 2 | v4nu | figs-doublet | οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν | 1 | Connecting Statement: | Here Paul uses three phrases with similar structure and meaning to strongly deny that he did anything to hurt any of the Corinthians. It is possible that the word **wronged** refers to doing something unjust, the word **ruined** refers to corrupting or perverting someone, and the phrase **took advantage of** refers to gaining money or things from somebody without doing anything in return. If the repetition would not communicate a strong denial in your language, or if you do not have three words for these ideas, you could express the idea with only one or two strong clauses. Alternate translation: “We wronged and took advantage of no one” or “We did not hurt any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) |
| 753 | 2CO | 7 | 3 | pgze | figs-explicit | οὐ λέγω | 1 | Here Paul refers to what he said in the previous verse about how he and those with him did not hurt anyone ([7:2](../07/02.md)). Here he wishes to clarify that he does not mean that it was the Corinthians who hurt people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I did not speak what I just spoke” or “I did not write that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 754 | 2CO | 7 | 3 | bhb7 | figs-abstractnouns | πρὸς κατάκρισιν | 1 | I do not speak for your condemnation | |
| 755 | 2CO | 7 | 3 | ckpm | figs-explicit | προείρηκα | 1 | Here Paul refers back to what he said in [6:11](../06/11.md): “our heart has been opened wide.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I told you earlier in this letter” or “I wrote above in this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 756 | 2CO | 7 | 3 | fay3 | figs-metaphor | ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε | 1 | you are in our hearts | Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were in the **hearts** of him and those with him. He means that they love the Corinthians very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you are in our affections” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 757 | 2CO | 7 | 3 | xzg3 | figs-idiom | εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν | 1 | for us to die together and to live together | Here Paul refers to two extreme alternates, dying and living, to indicate that nothing that happens will keep him and those with him from loving the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “come what may” or “whatever may happen to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 758 | 2CO | 7 | 4 | uamr | figs-abstractnouns | πολλή μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς, πολλή μοι καύχησις ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν | 1 | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confidence** and **boasting**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “I am very confident about you; I boast greatly on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 759 | 2CO | 7 | 4 | yp45 | figs-explicit | μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς | 1 | Here Pal could be saying that he: (1) is confident that they follow Christ and do what is right. Alternate translation: “is my confidence that you follow Christ” or “is my confidence that you are doing well” (2) can speak boldly or confidently to them. Alternate translation: “is my boldness in speaking to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 760 | 2CO | 7 | 4 | mh12 | figs-activepassive | πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει | 1 | I am filled with encouragement | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “You have filled me with encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 761 | 2CO | 7 | 4 | k5t2 | figs-abstractnouns | τῇ παρακλήσει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **encouragement**, you could express the idea by using a verbal form such as “comfort” or “cheer up.” Alternate translation: “how you comfort me” or “by how you cheer me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 762 | 2CO | 7 | 4 | mx9b | figs-metaphor | ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ | 1 | I overflow with joy | Here Paul speaks as if he were “overflowing” with **joy**. He means that he has so much **joy** that he feels like it has completely filled him up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am incredibly joyful” or “I have so much joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 763 | 2CO | 7 | 4 | mr75 | figs-abstractnouns | ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ | 1 | even in all our afflictions | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I overflow as I rejoice” or “I overflow with how joyful I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 764 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | rt1p | grammar-connect-words-phrases | καὶ γὰρ | 1 | what Paul said in [2:13](../02/13.md) about traveling to Macedonia. | |
| 765 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | f3c5 | figs-go | ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς | 1 | When we came to Macedonia | |
| 766 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | c8ju | figs-synecdoche | ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν | 1 | our flesh had no rest | Here, the phrase **our flesh** refers to the whole person. Paul uses it to emphasize the physical or bodily nature of their suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the whole person and not just their **flesh**. Alternate translation: “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) |
| 767 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | byp3 | figs-abstractnouns | οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν | 1 | ||
| 768 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | h3cv | figs-activepassive | ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι | 1 | we were troubled in every way | |
| 769 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | i4wr | figs-explicit | ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι | 1 | by conflicts on the outside and fears on the inside | Here, **without** could mean: (1) “outside of our bodies.” (2) “outside of the church.” The word **within** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 770 | 2CO | 7 | 5 | zkqr | figs-abstractnouns | ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι | 1 | ||
| 771 | 2CO | 7 | 7 | w7td | figs-explicit | ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν | 1 | by the comfort that Titus had received from you | Paul received **comfort** from knowing that the Corinthians had **comforted** Titus. Alternate translation: “by learning about the comfort that Titus had received from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 772 | 2CO | 7 | 8 | b2xj | ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη | 1 | General Information: | This refers to Paul’s previous **letter** to these Corinthian believers where he rebuked them for their acceptance of a believer’s sexual immorality with his father’s wife. | |
| 773 | 2CO | 7 | 8 | vk7m | βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη | 1 | when I saw that my letter | Alternate translation: “when I learned that my letter” | |
| 774 | 2CO | 7 | 9 | kn5q | figs-activepassive | οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε | 1 | not because you were distressed | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not because what I said in my letter distressed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 775 | 2CO | 7 | 9 | l6d2 | figs-idiom | ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν | 1 | you would not suffer loss in anything through us | This means that although the letter caused them sorrow, they eventually benefited from the letter because it led them to repentance. Alternate translation: “so that we did not harm you in any way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 776 | 2CO | 7 | 10 | dtm3 | figs-ellipsis | ἡ γὰρ κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν…ἐργάζεται | 1 | For the sorrow that God intends produces repentance that leads to salvation | The word **repentance** may be repeated to clarify its relationship to what precedes it and what follows it. Alternate translation: “For godly sorrow produces repentance, and repentance leads to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 777 | 2CO | 7 | 10 | lc4m | ἀμεταμέλητον | 1 | without regret | This could mean: (1) Paul has no **regret** that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) the Corinthians will not **regret** experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation. | |
| 778 | 2CO | 7 | 10 | lc1s | figs-explicit | ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη, θάνατον κατεργάζεται | 1 | But the sorrow of the world produces death | This kind of **sorrow** leads to **death** instead of salvation because it does not produce repentance. Alternate translation: “Worldly sorrow, however, leads to spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 779 | 2CO | 7 | 11 | gpp2 | figs-exclamations | ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν | 1 | what earnestness, what eagerness to defend yourselves | Here the word **what** makes this statement an exclamation. Alternate translation: “your determination to prove you were innocent was very great!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) |
| 780 | 2CO | 7 | 11 | h6jc | figs-activepassive | ἀλλὰ ἐκδίκησιν | 1 | what avenging of wrong | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone should carry out justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 781 | 2CO | 7 | 12 | i6sn | figs-activepassive | τοῦ φανερωθῆναι τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | your good will toward us should be made known to you in the sight of God | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you would know that your good will toward us is sincere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 782 | 2CO | 7 | 12 | ycy7 | ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | before God | Here, **before God** refers to God’s presence. See how you translated this in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md). | |
| 783 | 2CO | 7 | 13 | kn2q | figs-activepassive | διὰ τοῦτο παρακεκλήμεθα | 1 | For this reason we are encouraged | Here the phrase **this reason** refers to the way the Corinthians responded to Paul’s previous letter, as he described in the previous verse. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is what encourages us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 784 | 2CO | 7 | 13 | v2g6 | figs-activepassive | ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν | 1 | his spirit was refreshed by all of you | Here the word **spirit** refers to a person’s temperament and disposition. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you refreshed his spirit” or “all of you made him stop worrying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 785 | 2CO | 7 | 14 | b4uq | ὅτι εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι | 1 | For if I boasted to him about you | Alternate translation: “For although I boasted to him about you” | |
| 786 | 2CO | 7 | 14 | m22c | οὐ κατῃσχύνθην | 1 | I was not embarrassed | Alternate translation: “you did not disappoint me” | |
| 787 | 2CO | 7 | 14 | q5hg | ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη | 1 | our boasting about you to Titus proved to be true | Alternate translation: “you proved to Titus that our boasting about you was true” | |
| 788 | 2CO | 7 | 15 | d87j | figs-abstractnouns | τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν | 1 | the obedience of all of you | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **obedience**, you can express the same idea with the verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 789 | 2CO | 7 | 15 | g9bz | figs-doublet | μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν | 1 | you welcomed him with fear and trembling | Here, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) |
| 790 | 2CO | 7 | 15 | q47h | μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου | 1 | with fear and trembling | This could refer to: (1) great reverence for God. (2) great reverence for Titus. | |
| 791 | 2CO | 8 | intro | kl7m | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Gift to the church in Jerusalem<br><br>The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### We<br><br>Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md)) | |||
| 792 | 2CO | 8 | 1 | mm8g | 0 | Connecting Statement: | Having explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving. | ||
| 793 | 2CO | 8 | 1 | d1mj | figs-activepassive | τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας | 1 | the grace of God that has been given to the churches of Macedonia | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 794 | 2CO | 8 | 2 | fsq8 | figs-personification | ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν, ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν | 1 | the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity | Paul speaks of **joy** and **poverty** as if they were living things that can produce generosity. Alternate translation: “because of the people’s great joy and extreme poverty, they have become very generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) |
| 795 | 2CO | 8 | 2 | b7k5 | figs-metaphor | ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν | 1 | the abundance of their joy | Paul speaks of **joy** as if it were a physical object that could increase in size or quantity. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 796 | 2CO | 8 | 2 | pr8c | ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν…τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν | 1 | their deep poverty … the riches of their generosity | Though the churches of Macedonia have suffered testings of affliction and **poverty**, by God’s grace, they have been able to collect money for the believers in Jerusalem. | |
| 797 | 2CO | 8 | 2 | z6mt | τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν | 1 | the riches of their generosity | The word **riches** emphasizes the greatness of their generosity. Alternate translation: “a very great generosity” | |
| 798 | 2CO | 8 | 4 | nmw8 | figs-explicit | τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους | 1 | this ministry to the saints | Paul is referring to providing money to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “this ministry of providing for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 799 | 2CO | 8 | 6 | z42y | καθὼς προενήρξατο | 1 | he had already begun this task | Paul is referring to the collection of money from the Corinthians for the believers in Jerusalem. | |
| 800 | 2CO | 8 | 6 | vn4u | figs-explicit | καὶ ἐπιτελέσῃ εἰς ὑμᾶς καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην | 1 | he would complete among you this act of grace | Titus was to help the Corinthians to complete the collection of money. Alternate translation: “he should encourage you to finish collecting and giving your generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 801 | 2CO | 8 | 7 | fpe1 | figs-metaphor | ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι περισσεύητε | 1 | you should abound in this act of grace | Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers as if they should produce physical goods. Alternate translation: “make sure you do well in giving for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 802 | 2CO | 8 | 8 | wn2k | figs-explicit | διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς…τὸ τῆς ὑμετέρας ἀγάπης γνήσιον δοκιμάζων | 1 | to test … through the diligence of others | Paul is encouraging the Corinthians to give generously by comparing them with the generosity of the Macedonian churches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 803 | 2CO | 8 | 9 | c1ch | τὴν χάριν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν | 1 | the grace of our Lord | In this context, the word **grace** emphasizes the generosity with which Jesus had blessed the Corinthians. | |
| 804 | 2CO | 8 | 9 | iz6z | figs-metaphor | δι’ ὑμᾶς ἐπτώχευσεν, πλούσιος ὤν | 1 | though he was rich, for your sakes he became poor | Paul speaks of Jesus before his incarnation as **being rich**, and of his becoming human as becoming **poor**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 805 | 2CO | 8 | 9 | j5ym | figs-metaphor | ὑμεῖς τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ πλουτήσητε | 1 | through his poverty you might become rich | Paul speaks of the Corinthians becoming spiritually **rich** as a result of Jesus becoming human. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 806 | 2CO | 8 | 10 | b7ht | figs-explicit | ἐν τούτῳ | 1 | In this matter | Here the word **this** refers to Corinthians collecting money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “with regard to the collection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 807 | 2CO | 8 | 11 | fc27 | figs-abstractnouns | καθάπερ ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν | 1 | there was the readiness of your desire | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **readiness**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “just as you were eager and desired to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 808 | 2CO | 8 | 11 | d6ly | καὶ τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι | 1 | there may be the completion | Alternate translation: “complete it” or “finish it” | |
| 809 | 2CO | 8 | 12 | k9wh | καθὸ ἐὰν ἔχῃ | 1 | according to whatever a person has | Alternate translation: “if it is proportional to what the person giving has” | |
| 810 | 2CO | 8 | 13 | mp6k | 0 | For this | This verse refers back to collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. | ||
| 811 | 2CO | 8 | 13 | smk2 | figs-activepassive | ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις | 1 | for the ease of others, and your affliction | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you may relieve others and burden yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 812 | 2CO | 8 | 13 | ktd1 | ἐξ ἰσότητος | 1 | for the sake of equality | Alternate translation: “so that there would be equality” | |
| 813 | 2CO | 8 | 14 | v7aj | ἵνα καὶ τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα | 1 | This is also so that their abundance may supply your need | Since the Corinthians are acting in the present time, it is implied that the believers in Jerusalem will also help them at some time in the future. Alternate translation: “this is also so that in the future their abundance may supply your need” | |
| 814 | 2CO | 8 | 15 | ue8w | figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | as it is written | Here Paul quotes from Exodus. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language.If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 815 | 2CO | 8 | 15 | u28y | figs-doublenegatives | οὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν | 1 | did not have too little | If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … too little**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “had all he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) |
| 816 | 2CO | 8 | 16 | cr18 | figs-synecdoche | τῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου | 1 | who put into Titus’ heart the same earnest care that I have for you | Here, **heart** refers to the emotions. This means that God caused Titus to love them. Alternate translation: “the one who made Titus care for you as much as I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) |
| 817 | 2CO | 8 | 16 | vsm3 | τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν | 1 | same earnest care | Alternate translation: “the same enthusiasm” or “same deep concern” | |
| 818 | 2CO | 8 | 17 | e4xn | figs-explicit | ὅτι τὴν μὲν παράκλησιν ἐδέξατο | 1 | For he not only accepted our appeal | Paul is referring to his asking Titus to return to Corinth and complete the collection. Alternate translation: “For he not only agreed to our request that he help you with the collection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 819 | 2CO | 8 | 18 | rje2 | μετ’ αὐτοῦ | 1 | with him | Alternate translation: “with Titus” | |
| 820 | 2CO | 8 | 18 | jll9 | figs-activepassive | τὸν ἀδελφὸν, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος…διὰ πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν | 1 | the brother who is praised among all of the churches | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brother whom believers among all of the churches praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 821 | 2CO | 8 | 19 | j9rk | οὐ μόνον | 1 | Not only this | Alternate translation: “not only do believers among all of the churches praise him” | |
| 822 | 2CO | 8 | 19 | c667 | figs-activepassive | καὶ χειροτονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν | 1 | he also was selected by the churches | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the churches also selected him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 823 | 2CO | 8 | 19 | k7dy | σὺν τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν | 1 | along with this act of grace which is being administered by us | This refers to taking the offering to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to carry out this act of generosity” | |
| 824 | 2CO | 8 | 19 | v22x | προθυμίαν ἡμῶν | 1 | our readiness | Alternate translation: “our eagerness to help” | |
| 825 | 2CO | 8 | 20 | a3ps | figs-abstractnouns | ἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν | 1 | concerning this generosity that we are carrying out | This refers to taking the offering to Jerusalem. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **administration**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “concerning the way we are handling this generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 826 | 2CO | 8 | 21 | n4x1 | προνοοῦμεν γὰρ καλὰ | 1 | For we considered beforehand what is right | Alternate translation: “We are careful to handle this gift in an honorable way” | |
| 827 | 2CO | 8 | 21 | ey5n | ἐνώπιον Κυρίου…ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων | 1 | before the Lord … before people | Alternate translation: “in the Lord’s opinion … in people’s opinion” | |
| 828 | 2CO | 8 | 22 | d3yj | αὐτοῖς | 1 | with them | The word **them** refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother. | |
| 829 | 2CO | 8 | 23 | mmi2 | κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός | 1 | he is my partner and fellow worker for you | Alternate translation: “he is my partner who works with me to help you” | |
| 830 | 2CO | 8 | 23 | lat3 | ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν | 1 | As for our brothers | Here, **our brothers** refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. | |
| 831 | 2CO | 8 | 23 | u8lx | figs-activepassive | ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν | 1 | they are sent by the churches | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the churches have sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 832 | 2CO | 8 | 23 | a8v2 | figs-abstractnouns | δόξα Χριστοῦ | 1 | an honor to Christ | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **glory**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “they will cause people to honor Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 833 | 2CO | 9 | intro | lt8d | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphors<br><br>Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) | |||
| 834 | 2CO | 9 | 1 | wc5l | 0 | Connecting Statement: | Paul continues on the subject of giving. He wants to make sure that the collection of their offering for the needy believers in Jerusalem takes place before he comes so that it does not seem as though he takes advantage of them. He talks about how giving blesses the giver and glorifies God. | ||
| 835 | 2CO | 9 | 1 | fxs3 | figs-explicit | τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους | 1 | the ministry that is for the saints | This refers to the collection of money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 836 | 2CO | 9 | 2 | rd2g | translate-names | Ἀχαΐα | 1 | General Information: | When Paul refers to **Achaia**, he is talking about a Roman province located in southern Greece where Corinth is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) |
| 837 | 2CO | 9 | 2 | i529 | figs-metonymy | Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται | 1 | Achaia has been ready | Here the word **Achaia** refers to the people who live in this province, and specifically to the people of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “the people of Achaia have been preparing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 838 | 2CO | 9 | 3 | r5pp | τοὺς ἀδελφούς | 1 | the brothers | Here, **the brothers** refers to Titus and the two men who accompany him. | |
| 839 | 2CO | 9 | 3 | k1er | μὴ τὸ καύχημα ἡμῶν, τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, κενωθῇ | 1 | our boasting about you may not be futile | Paul does not want others to think that the things that he had boasted about the Corinthians were false. | |
| 840 | 2CO | 9 | 4 | j8ey | εὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους | 1 | find you unprepared | Alternate translation: “find you unprepared to give” | |
| 841 | 2CO | 9 | 5 | q1up | figs-go | τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, ἵνα προέλθωσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς | 1 | the brothers they they would come to you | From Paul’s perspective, **the brothers** are going. Alternate translation: “the brothers to come to you beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) |
| 842 | 2CO | 9 | 5 | nm2n | figs-activepassive | μὴ ὡς πλεονεξίαν | 1 | not as forced | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not as something that we forced you to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 843 | 2CO | 9 | 6 | mm9w | figs-metaphor | ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει | 1 | the one who sows … will also reap in blessings | Paul uses the image of a farmer sowing seeds to describe the results of giving. As a farmer’s harvest is based on how much he **sows**, so will God’s **blessings** be little or much based on how generously the Corinthians give. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 844 | 2CO | 9 | 7 | tzt4 | figs-metonymy | καθὼς προῄρηται τῇ καρδίᾳ | 1 | let each one give as he has decided in his heart | Here, **heart** refers to the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “just as he has determined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 845 | 2CO | 9 | 7 | whg6 | figs-abstractnouns | μὴ ἐκ λύπης ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης | 1 | not reluctantly or under compulsion | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **sorrow** and **compulsion**, you can express the same idea with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “not because he feels guilty or because someone is compelling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 846 | 2CO | 9 | 7 | t26d | ἱλαρὸν γὰρ δότην ἀγαπᾷ ὁ Θεός | 1 | for God loves a cheerful giver | God wants people to give gladly to help provide for fellow believers. | |
| 847 | 2CO | 9 | 8 | cz9b | figs-metaphor | δυνατεῖ δὲ ὁ Θεὸς, πᾶσαν χάριν περισσεῦσαι εἰς ὑμᾶς | 1 | God is able to make all grace overflow for you | Here, **grace** is spoken of as if it were a physical object of which a person can have more than he can use. As a person gives financially to other believers, **God** also gives to the giver everything he needs. Alternate translation: “God is able to give you more than you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 848 | 2CO | 9 | 8 | zxz9 | χάριν | 1 | grace | Here, **grace** refers to the physical things a Christian needs, not to the need for God to save him from his sins. | |
| 849 | 2CO | 9 | 8 | u8w6 | περισσεύητε εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν | 1 | you may abound in every good work | Alternate translation: “so that you may be able to do more and more good deeds” | |
| 850 | 2CO | 9 | 9 | mma1 | figs-activepassive | καθὼς γέγραπται | 1 | just as it is written | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is just as the writer wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 851 | 2CO | 9 | 10 | p3fl | ὁ…ἐπιχορηγῶν | 1 | He who supplies | Alternate translation: “God who supplies” | |
| 852 | 2CO | 9 | 10 | b1xe | figs-metonymy | ἄρτον εἰς βρῶσιν | 1 | bread for food | Here the word **bread** refers to **food** in general. Alternate translation: “food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 853 | 2CO | 9 | 10 | uts1 | figs-metaphor | χορηγήσει καὶ πληθυνεῖ τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν | 1 | will supply and multiply your seed for sowing | Paul speaks of the Corinthians’ possessions as if they are seeds and of giving to others as if they were **sowing** seeds. Alternate translation: “will also supply and multiply your possessions so that you can sow them by giving them to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 854 | 2CO | 9 | 10 | ci67 | figs-metaphor | αὐξήσει τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν | 1 | will increase the fruits of your righteousness | Paul compares the benefits that the Corinthians will receive from their generosity to that of a harvest. Alternate translation: “God will bless you even more for your righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 855 | 2CO | 9 | 10 | yv67 | τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν | 1 | the fruits of your righteousness | Here, **righteousness** refers to the righteous actions of the Corinthians in giving their resources to the believers in Jerusalem. | |
| 856 | 2CO | 9 | 11 | eey1 | figs-activepassive | πλουτιζόμενοι | 1 | enriching you | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will enrich you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 857 | 2CO | 9 | 11 | b3e5 | figs-explicit | ἥτις κατεργάζεται δι’ ἡμῶν, εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | which produces thanksgiving to God through us | The word **which** refers to the Corinthian’s generosity. Alternate translation: “Because of your generosity, those who receive the gifts we bring them will thank God” or “and when we give your gifts to those who need them, they will give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 858 | 2CO | 9 | 12 | l7kq | figs-explicit | ὅτι ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης | 1 | For the ministry of this service | Here, **service** refers to Paul and his companions bringing the contribution to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “For our carrying out this service for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 859 | 2CO | 9 | 12 | esk7 | figs-metaphor | ἀλλὰ καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ | 1 | but is also overflowing into many acts of thanksgiving to God | Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers’ act of service as if it were a liquid of which there is more than a container can hold. Alternate translation: “It also causes many deeds for which people will thank God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 860 | 2CO | 9 | 13 | plj4 | figs-activepassive | διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης | 1 | Because of the proof of this ministry | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 861 | 2CO | 9 | 13 | ze14 | δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας | 1 | they glorify God for your obedience … the generosity of your sharing with them and with everyone | Paul says that the Corinthians will **glorify God** both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need. | |
| 862 | 2CO | 9 | 15 | es8c | ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ | 1 | for his inexpressible gift | This **gift** could refer to: (1) “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers. | |
| 863 | 2CO | 10 | intro | abcd | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.<br><br>In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Boasting<br><br>“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Flesh<br><br>“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) | |||
| 864 | 2CO | 10 | 1 | yc1g | 0 | Connecting Statement: | Paul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does. | ||
| 865 | 2CO | 10 | 1 | gq7j | figs-abstractnouns | διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | by the meekness and gentleness of Christ | If your language does not use abstract noun for the ideas behind the word **meekness** and **gentleness**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 866 | 2CO | 10 | 2 | i6hh | τοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς | 1 | those who regard | Alternate translation: “who think of us” | |
| 867 | 2CO | 10 | 2 | ik1p | figs-metonymy | ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας | 1 | as walking according to the flesh | Here, **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are acting from human motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 868 | 2CO | 10 | 3 | cvd6 | figs-metaphor | ἐν σαρκὶ…περιπατοῦντες | 1 | we walk in the flesh | Here, **walking** is a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “we live our lives in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 869 | 2CO | 10 | 3 | zbet | figs-metonymy | ἐν σαρκὶ…περιπατοῦντες | 1 | Here, **flesh** is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “we live our lives in physical bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) | |
| 870 | 2CO | 10 | 3 | k7h8 | figs-metaphor | οὐ…στρατευόμεθα | 1 | we do not wage war | Paul speaks of his trying to persuade the Corinthians to believe him and not the false teachers as if he were fighting a physical **war**. These words should be translated literally. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 871 | 2CO | 10 | 3 | gpd3 | figs-metonymy | οὐ κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα | 1 | wage war according to the flesh | The word **flesh** is: (1) a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 872 | 2CO | 10 | 4 | uf5s | figs-metaphor | τὰ…ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες | 1 | the weapons we fight with … for pulling down arguments | Paul speaks of godly wisdom showing human wisdom to be false as if it were a weapon with which he was destroying an enemy stronghold. Alternate translation: “the weapons we fight with … show people that what our enemies say is completely wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 873 | 2CO | 10 | 4 | d1gj | figs-metonymy | οὐ σαρκικὰ | 1 | are not fleshly | The word **fleshly** is: (1) a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 874 | 2CO | 10 | 5 | xuz9 | πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον | 1 | every high thing that rises up | Paul is still speaking with the metaphor of a war, as if “the knowledge of God” were an army and **every high thing** were a wall that people had made to keep the army out. Alternate translation: “every false argument that proud people think of to protect themselves” | |
| 875 | 2CO | 10 | 5 | b74d | πᾶν ὕψωμα | 1 | every high thing | Alternate translation: “everything that proud people do” | |
| 876 | 2CO | 10 | 5 | vm1a | figs-metaphor | ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ | 1 | rises up against the knowledge of God | Paul speaks of arguments as if they were a wall standing high against an army. The phrase **rises up** mean “stands tall,” not that the “high thing” is floating up into the air. Alternate translation: “people use so they will not have to know who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 877 | 2CO | 10 | 5 | r2yz | figs-metaphor | αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | We take every thought captive into obedience to Christ | Paul speaks of people’s thoughts as if they were enemy soldiers whom he captures in battle. Alternate translation: “we show how all the false ideas those people have are wrong and teach the people to obey Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 878 | 2CO | 10 | 6 | m4ds | figs-metonymy | ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν | 1 | to avenge every act of disobedience | Here, **act of disobedience** is a metonym for the people who commit those acts. Alternate translation: “punish every one of you who disobey us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 879 | 2CO | 10 | 7 | y2yb | figs-rquestion | τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε | 1 | You are looking at the appearance of things | This could be: (1) a command. (2) a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 880 | 2CO | 10 | 7 | z1t5 | τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ | 1 | let him remind himself | Alternate translation: “he needs to remember” | |
| 881 | 2CO | 10 | 7 | f3i9 | καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς | 1 | that just as he is Christ’s, so also are we | Alternate translation: “we belong to Christ just as much as he does” | |
| 882 | 2CO | 10 | 8 | d4zu | figs-metaphor | εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν | 1 | to build you up and not to destroy you | Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 883 | 2CO | 10 | 9 | nw6e | ἂν ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς | 1 | I would terrify you | Alternate translation: “I am trying to frighten you” | |
| 884 | 2CO | 10 | 11 | m6m6 | τοῦτο λογιζέσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος | 1 | Let such a one consider this | Alternate translation: “I want such people to be aware” | |
| 885 | 2CO | 10 | 11 | g58z | οἷοί ἐσμεν τῷ λόγῳ δι’ ἐπιστολῶν ἀπόντες, τοιοῦτοι καὶ παρόντες τῷ ἔργῳ | 1 | what we are in the words of our letters when we are absent is what we will be in our actions when we are there | Alternate translation: “we will do the same things when we are there with you that we have written about in our letters while we have been away from you” | |
| 886 | 2CO | 10 | 11 | kb55 | figs-exclusive | ἐσμεν | 1 | we are | Here, **we** refers to Paul’s ministry team but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) |
| 887 | 2CO | 10 | 12 | k94z | ἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι ἑαυτούς, τισιν | 1 | to group or compare ourselves | Alternate translation: “to say we are as good as some” | |
| 888 | 2CO | 10 | 12 | i85y | figs-parallelism | αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς | 1 | they measure themselves by one another and compare themselves with each other | Both of these clauses mean essentially the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) |
| 889 | 2CO | 10 | 12 | n8sx | figs-metaphor | αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες | 1 | they measure themselves by one another | Paul is speaking of goodness as though it were something whose length people could **measure**. Alternate translation: “they look at each other and try to see who is better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 890 | 2CO | 10 | 12 | zwl5 | οὐ συνιᾶσιν | 1 | have no understanding | Alternate translation: “show everyone that they do not know anything” | |
| 891 | 2CO | 10 | 13 | x79x | figs-metaphor | 0 | General Information: | Paul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules, those things over which he has authority as being within the borders or “limits” of his land, and those things not under his authority as being beyond the “limits.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 892 | 2CO | 10 | 13 | a4ud | figs-idiom | οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχησόμεθα | 1 | will not boast beyond limits | This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will not boast about things over which we have no authority” or “will boast only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 893 | 2CO | 10 | 13 | u84l | κατὰ τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος, οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς | 1 | according to the measure of the area that God has assigned to us | Alternate translation: “about things under the authority that God has given us to do” | |
| 894 | 2CO | 10 | 13 | fx2b | figs-metaphor | μέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν | 1 | a measure that reached even as far as you | Paul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules. Alternate translation: “and you are within the border of our authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 895 | 2CO | 10 | 14 | ay6h | οὐ…ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς | 1 | we are not overextending ourselves | Alternate translation: “we did not go beyond our borders” | |
| 896 | 2CO | 10 | 15 | hu9l | figs-idiom | οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι | 1 | Neither do we boast beyond limits about | This is an idiom. See how similar words were translated in [2 Corinthians 10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “And we have not boasted about things over which we have no authority” or “We have not boasted only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 897 | 2CO | 10 | 16 | raq7 | ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι | 1 | another person’s area | Alternate translation: “an area that God has assigned to someone else” | |
| 898 | 2CO | 10 | 17 | q8cc | ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω | 1 | boast in the Lord | Alternate translation: “let … boast about what the Lord has done” | |
| 899 | 2CO | 10 | 18 | h81t | ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων | 1 | who commends himself | This means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how “recommend ourselves” is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md). | |
| 900 | 2CO | 10 | 18 | n5v6 | figs-activepassive | οὐ…ἐστιν δόκιμος | 1 | is approved | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is not whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 901 | 2CO | 10 | 18 | sy2r | figs-ellipsis | ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν | 1 | the one whom the Lord commends | You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 902 | 2CO | 11 | intro | abce | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### False teaching<br><br>The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])<br><br>### Light<br><br>Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Metaphor<br><br>Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.<br><br>“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.<br><br>The statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.<br><br>“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”<br><br>He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”<br><br>### “Are they servants of Christ?”<br><br>This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](../11/30.md)) | |||
| 903 | 2CO | 11 | 1 | r4q6 | ἀνείχεσθέ μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης | 1 | bear with me in a little bit of foolishness | Alternate translation: “you would allow me allow me to act like a fool” | |
| 904 | 2CO | 11 | 2 | m6vl | ζηλῶ…ὑμᾶς Θεοῦ ζήλῳ | 1 | jealous … jealousy | These words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him. | |
| 905 | 2CO | 11 | 2 | ee9i | figs-metaphor | ἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ, παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ | 1 | for I promised you in marriage to one husband, to present you as a pure virgin to Christ | Paul speaks of his care for the Corinthian believers as if he had **promised** another man that he would prepare his daughter to marry him and he is most concerned that he be able to keep his promise to the man. Alternate translation: “for I was like a father who promised to present his daughter to one husband. I promised to keep you as a pure virgin so I could give you to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 906 | 2CO | 11 | 3 | l2hr | φοβοῦμαι δὲ, μή πως ὡς ὁ ὄφις ἐξηπάτησεν Εὕαν ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ, φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν | 1 | But I am afraid that somehow … the sincerity and the purity that are in Christ | Alternate translation: “But I am afraid that somehow your thoughts might be led astray from a sincere and pure devotion to Christ just as the serpent deceived Eve by his craftiness” | |
| 907 | 2CO | 11 | 3 | m5zn | figs-metaphor | φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν | 1 | your thoughts might be led astray | Paul speaks of **thoughts** as if they were animals that people could lead along the wrong path. Alternate translation: “someone might cause you to believe lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 908 | 2CO | 11 | 4 | wq57 | εἰ μὲν γὰρ ὁ ἐρχόμενος | 1 | For if one who comes | Alternate translation: “When anyone comes and” | |
| 909 | 2CO | 11 | 4 | l7m8 | πνεῦμα ἕτερον…ὃ οὐκ ἐλάβετε, ἢ εὐαγγέλιον ἕτερον ὃ οὐκ ἐδέξασθε | 1 | or you receive a different spirit which you did not receive, or you receive a different gospel which you did not accept | Alternate translation: “a different spirit than the Holy Spirit, or a different gospel than you received from us” | |
| 910 | 2CO | 11 | 4 | fs5z | καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε | 1 | you are bearing with it well | See how these words were translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you are dealing correctly with these things” | |
| 911 | 2CO | 11 | 5 | eet1 | figs-irony | τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων | 1 | those super-apostles | Paul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say there are. Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) |
| 912 | 2CO | 11 | 6 | f8d1 | figs-litotes | οὐ τῇ γνώσει | 1 | I am not untrained in knowledge | This negative phrase emphasizes the positive truth that he is trained in knowledge. Alternate translation: “I am certainly trained in knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) |
| 913 | 2CO | 11 | 6 | n7xy | figs-abstractnouns | οὐ τῇ γνώσει | 1 | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **knowledge**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “I am trained to know what they know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) | |
| 914 | 2CO | 11 | 7 | un9v | figs-rquestion | ἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε, ὅτι δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν? | 1 | Or did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted? | Paul is beginning to claim that he treated the Corinthians well. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I think we agree that I did not sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 915 | 2CO | 11 | 7 | ax51 | δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν | 1 | freely preached the gospel of God to you | Alternate translation: “I preached the gospel of God to you without expecting anything from you in return” | |
| 916 | 2CO | 11 | 8 | k6ds | figs-hyperbole | ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα | 1 | I robbed other churches | This is an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul received money from **churches** who were not obligated to give to him. Alternate translation: “I accepted money from other churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) |
| 917 | 2CO | 11 | 8 | a416 | figs-explicit | τὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν | 1 | the ministry to you | The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I could serve you at no cost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 918 | 2CO | 11 | 9 | a23k | οἱ ἀδελφοὶ ἐλθόντες | 1 | the brothers who came | These **brothers** were probably all male. | |
| 919 | 2CO | 11 | 9 | fc6l | figs-metaphor | ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω | 1 | In everything I have kept myself from being a burden to you | Paul speaks of someone for whom one has to spend money as if they were heavy items that people have to carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 920 | 2CO | 11 | 9 | sqcf | figs-explicit | ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω | 1 | The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I have done all I can to make sure you do not have to spend money so that I can be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) | |
| 921 | 2CO | 11 | 9 | b35r | ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν…ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω | 1 | I will continue to do that | Alternate translation: “I never will be a burden to you” | |
| 922 | 2CO | 11 | 10 | si2r | ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ | 1 | the truth of Christ is in me | Paul is emphasizing that because his readers know that he tells the **truth** about **Christ**, they can know that he is telling the truth here. “As surely as you know that I truly know and proclaim the truth about Christ, you could know that what I am about to say is true” | |
| 923 | 2CO | 11 | 10 | nae3 | figs-activepassive | ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ | 1 | this boasting of mine will not be silenced | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make me stop boasting and stay silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 924 | 2CO | 11 | 10 | ua2i | ἡ καύχησις αὕτη…εἰς ἐμὲ | 1 | this boasting of mine | This refers to what Paul spoke about starting in ([2 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md)). | |
| 925 | 2CO | 11 | 11 | zqu5 | figs-rquestion | διὰ τί? ὅτι οὐκ ἀγαπῶ ὑμᾶς? | 1 | Why? Because I do not love you? | Paul uses rhetorical questions to emphasize love for the Corinthians. These questions can be combined or made into a statement. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could combine them or express them as statements. Alternate translation: “Is it because I do not love you that I do not want to be a burden to you?” or “I will continue to keep you from paying for my needs because this shows others that I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 926 | 2CO | 11 | 11 | rj6f | figs-ellipsis | ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν | 1 | God knows | You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “God knows I love you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 927 | 2CO | 11 | 12 | d9sl | figs-metaphor | ἵνα ἐκκόψω τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται, εὑρεθῶσιν καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς | 1 | in order that I may take away the opportunity | Paul speaks of a false claim that his enemies state as if it were something that he can carry away. Alternate translation: “so that I might make it impossible for those who are trying to get people to regard them as highly as they respect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 928 | 2CO | 11 | 12 | t4js | figs-activepassive | εὑρεθῶσιν | 1 | they may be regarded as equal to us | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people will think highly of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 929 | 2CO | 11 | 13 | ml66 | οἱ γὰρ τοιοῦτοι | 1 | For such people | Alternate translation: “I do what I do because people like them” | |
| 930 | 2CO | 11 | 13 | nq3t | ἐργάται δόλιοι | 1 | deceitful workers | Alternate translation: “dishonest workers” | |
| 931 | 2CO | 11 | 13 | y896 | μετασχηματιζόμενοι εἰς ἀποστόλους | 1 | disguising themselves as apostles | Alternate translation: “are not apostles, but they try to make themselves look like apostles” | |
| 932 | 2CO | 11 | 14 | v9z4 | figs-litotes | οὐ θαῦμα | 1 | no wonder | By stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should expect this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) |
| 933 | 2CO | 11 | 14 | ss7s | αὐτὸς…ὁ Σατανᾶς μετασχηματίζεται εἰς ἄγγελον φωτός | 1 | Satan disguises himself as an angel of light | Alternate translation: “Satan is not an angel of light, but he tries to make himself look like an angel of light” | |
| 934 | 2CO | 11 | 14 | mld4 | figs-metaphor | ἄγγελον φωτός | 1 | an angel of light | Here, **light** is a metaphor for righteousness. Alternate translation: “an angel of righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 935 | 2CO | 11 | 15 | fvx7 | figs-litotes | οὐ μέγα…εἰ | 1 | it is no great thing | By stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should certainly expect to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) |
| 936 | 2CO | 11 | 15 | sb58 | καὶ οἱ διάκονοι αὐτοῦ μετασχηματίζονται ὡς διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης | 1 | his servants also disguise themselves as servants of righteousness | Alternate translation: “his servants are not servants of righteousness, but they try to make themselves look like servants of righteousness” | |
| 937 | 2CO | 11 | 16 | s962 | γε κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέξασθέ με, ἵνα κἀγὼ μικρόν τι καυχήσωμαι | 1 | receive me as a fool so I may boast a little | Alternate translation: “receive me as you would receive a fool: let me talk, and consider my boasting the words of a fool” | |
| 938 | 2CO | 11 | 18 | t4ic | figs-metonymy | κατὰ σάρκα | 1 | according to the flesh | Here the metonym **flesh** refers to man in his sinful nature and his achievements. Alternate translation: “about their own human achievements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 939 | 2CO | 11 | 19 | u8f3 | ἀνέχεσθε τῶν ἀφρόνων | 1 | put up with the foolish | See how a similar phrase was translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you … accept me when I act like a fool” | |
| 940 | 2CO | 11 | 19 | si6l | figs-irony | φρόνιμοι ὄντες | 1 | being wise | Paul is shaming the Corinthians by using irony. Alternate translation: “thinking that you are wise, even through you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) |
| 941 | 2CO | 11 | 20 | zmfo | figs-hyperbole | εἴ τις ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ, εἴ τις κατεσθίει | 1 | Paul is using exaggeration when he speaks of some people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves or devouring them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) | |
| 942 | 2CO | 11 | 20 | lu7d | figs-metaphor | ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ | 1 | enslaves you | Paul speaks of people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves. Alternate translation: “makes you follow rules they have thought of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 943 | 2CO | 11 | 20 | sr4n | figs-metaphor | κατεσθίει | 1 | he consumes you | Paul speaks of the super-apostles’ taking people’s material resources as if they were eating the people themselves. Alternate translation: “takes all your property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 944 | 2CO | 11 | 20 | yn5t | λαμβάνει | 1 | takes advantage of you | A person **takes advantage of** another person by knowing things that the other person does not and using that knowledge to help himself and harm the other person. | |
| 945 | 2CO | 11 | 21 | n8s9 | figs-irony | κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν! | 1 | I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that | Paul is using irony to tell the Corinthians that it was not because he was **weak** that he treated them well. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to say that we had the power to harm you, but we treated you well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) |
| 946 | 2CO | 11 | 21 | v8a3 | ἐν ᾧ…ἄν τις τολμᾷ…τολμῶ κἀγώ | 1 | Yet if anyone boasts … I too will boast | Alternate translation: “in whatever anyone boasts about … I will dare to boast about it also” | |
| 947 | 2CO | 11 | 22 | jdq8 | figs-rquestion | Ἑβραῖοί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. Ἰσραηλεῖταί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ εἰσιν? κἀγώ. | 1 | Are they Hebrews? … Are they Israelites? … Are they descendants of Abraham? | Paul is asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They want you to think they are important and to believe what they say because they are Hebrews and Israelites and descendants of Abraham. Well, so am I!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 948 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | a4tz | figs-rquestion | διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ | 1 | Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more | Paul continues asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They say they are servants of Christ—I speak as though I were out of my mind—but I am more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 949 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | bq23 | παραφρονῶν λαλῶ | 1 | as though I were out of my mind | Alternate translation: “I speak as though I were unable to think well” | |
| 950 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | vy54 | figs-ellipsis | ὑπὲρ ἐγώ | 1 | I am more | You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “I am more a servant of Christ than they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) |
| 951 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | s8wq | ἐν κόποις περισσοτέρως | 1 | in even more hard work | Alternate translation: “I have worked harder” | |
| 952 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | dr6x | ἐν φυλακαῖς περισσοτέρως | 1 | in far more imprisonments | Alternate translation: “I have been in prisons more often” | |
| 953 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | cs3f | figs-idiom | ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως | 1 | in beatings beyond measure | Here, **beyond measure** is an idiom that means he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten very many times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) |
| 954 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | qdcm | figs-hyperbole | ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως | 1 | This is exaggerated to emphasize that he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten too many times to bother counting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) | |
| 955 | 2CO | 11 | 23 | r6jv | ἐν θανάτοις πολλάκις | 1 | in facing many dangers of death | Alternate translation: “and I have almost died many times” | |
| 956 | 2CO | 11 | 24 | ttz2 | τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν | 1 | forty lashes minus one | This was a common expression for being whipped 39 times. In Jewish law the most they were allowed to whip a person at one time was forty lashes. So they commonly whipped a person thirty-nine times so that they would be guilty of whipping someone too many times if the accidentally counted wrong. | |
| 957 | 2CO | 11 | 25 | u9xc | figs-activepassive | ἐραβδίσθην | 1 | I was beaten with rods | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people beat me with wooden rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 958 | 2CO | 11 | 25 | xk9w | figs-activepassive | ἐλιθάσθην | 1 | I was stoned | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people threw stones at me until they thought I was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 959 | 2CO | 11 | 25 | b4kz | νυχθήμερον ἐν τῷ βυθῷ πεποίηκα | 1 | I have spent a night and a day on the open sea | Paul was referring to floating in the water after the ship he was on sank. | |
| 960 | 2CO | 11 | 26 | b3j9 | figs-explicit | κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις | 1 | in danger from false brothers | The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and in danger from people who claimed to be brothers in Christ, but who betrayed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 961 | 2CO | 11 | 27 | ds5h | figs-hyperbole | γυμνότητι | 1 | nakedness | Here Paul exaggerates to show his need of clothing. Alternate translation: “without enough clothing to keep me warm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) |
| 962 | 2CO | 11 | 28 | n1q5 | figs-metaphor | ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν | 1 | there is the daily pressure on me of my anxiety | Paul knows that God will hold him responsible for how well the **churches** obey God and speaks of that knowledge as if it were a heavy object pushing him down. Alternate translation: “I know that God will hold me accountable for the spiritual growth of all the churches, and so I always feel like a heavy object is pushing me down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 963 | 2CO | 11 | 29 | fvz6 | figs-rquestion | τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ? | 1 | Who is weak, and I am not weak? | This rhetorical question emphasizes that Paul cares about people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone is weak, I feel that weakness also.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 964 | 2CO | 11 | 29 | hhb2 | figs-metaphor | τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ? | 1 | Who is weak, and I am not weak? | The word **weak** is probably a metaphor for a spiritual condition, but no one is sure what Paul is speaking of, so it is best to use the same word here. Alternate translation: “I am weak whenever anyone else is weak.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 965 | 2CO | 11 | 29 | g5am | figs-metaphor | τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι? | 1 | Who has been caused to stumble, and I do not burn? | Here Paul’s anger is spoken of as a burning inside him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 966 | 2CO | 11 | 29 | bdd4 | figs-rquestion | τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι? | 1 | Paul uses this question to express his anger when a fellow believer is caused to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone causes a brother to sin, I am angry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 967 | 2CO | 11 | 29 | xu57 | figs-metaphor | σκανδαλίζεται | 1 | has been caused to stumble | Paul speaks of sin as if it were tripping over something and then falling. Alternate translation: “has been led to sin” or “has thought that God would permit him to sin because of something that someone else did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 968 | 2CO | 11 | 30 | gxe6 | τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας | 1 | what shows my weaknesses | Alternate translation: “what shows how weak I am” | |
| 969 | 2CO | 11 | 31 | yx8z | figs-litotes | οὐ ψεύδομαι | 1 | I am not lying | Paul is using litotes to emphasize that he is telling the truth. Alternate translation: “I am telling the absolute truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) |
| 970 | 2CO | 11 | 32 | n383 | ὁ ἐθνάρχης Ἁρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως ἐφρούρει τὴν πόλιν | 1 | the governor under King Aretas was guarding the city | Alternate translation: “the governor whom King Aretas had appointed had told men to guard the city” | |
| 971 | 2CO | 11 | 32 | j7de | πιάσαι με | 1 | to arrest me | Alternate translation: “so that they might catch and arrest me” | |
| 972 | 2CO | 11 | 33 | i8xa | figs-activepassive | ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην | 1 | I was lowered in a basket | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 973 | 2CO | 11 | 33 | aw7d | figs-metonymy | τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ | 1 | from his hands | Paul uses the governor’s **hands** as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: “from the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 974 | 2CO | 12 | intro | abcf | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.<br><br>When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Paul’s vision<br><br>Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])<br><br>### Third heaven<br><br>Many scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Sarcasm<br><br>Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Paradox<br><br>A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](../12/05.md)) | |||
| 975 | 2CO | 12 | 1 | iwn3 | 0 | Connecting Statement: | In defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer. | ||
| 976 | 2CO | 12 | 1 | iur3 | ἐλεύσομαι…εἰς | 1 | I will go on to | Alternate translation: “I will continue talking, but now about” | |
| 977 | 2CO | 12 | 1 | rb42 | figs-hendiadys | ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου | 1 | visions and revelations from the Lord | This could mean: (1) Paul uses the words **visions** and **revelations** to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: “things that the Lord has allowed only me to see” (2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: “secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) |
| 978 | 2CO | 12 | 2 | cz7u | οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ | 1 | I know a man in Christ | Paul is actually speaking of himself as if he were speaking of someone else, but this should be translated literally if possible. | |
| 979 | 2CO | 12 | 2 | fth2 | εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα | 1 | whether in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not know | Paul continues to describe himself as if this happened to another person. “I do not know if this man was in his physical body or in his spiritual body” | |
| 980 | 2CO | 12 | 2 | k4aw | τρίτου οὐρανοῦ | 1 | the third heaven | Here, the **third heaven** refers to the dwelling place of God rather than the sky or outer space (the planets, stars, and the universe). | |
| 981 | 2CO | 12 | 4 | qv5h | ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον | 1 | was caught up into paradise | Paul continues his account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into **paradise**. (2) an angel took this man into **paradise**. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took him up to paradise” or “they took him up to paradise.” | |
| 982 | 2CO | 12 | 4 | wm7y | ἡρπάγη | 1 | caught up | Here, **caught up** refers to being suddenly and forcefully held and taken. | |
| 983 | 2CO | 12 | 4 | ic45 | τὸν Παράδεισον | 1 | paradise | Here, **paradise** could refer to: (1) heaven. (2) the third heaven. (3) a special place in heaven. | |
| 984 | 2CO | 12 | 5 | hpq6 | τοῦ τοιούτου | 1 | of such a person | Alternate translation: “of that person” | |
| 985 | 2CO | 12 | 5 | i12f | οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις | 1 | I will not boast, except about my weaknesses | You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I will boast only of my weaknesses” | |
| 986 | 2CO | 12 | 6 | p8fm | μή τις εἰς ἐμὲ λογίσηται ὑπὲρ ὃ βλέπει με, ἢ ἀκούει ἐξ ἐμοῦ | 1 | no one will think more of me than what he sees in me or hears from me | Alternate translation: “no one will give me more credit than what he sees in me or hears from me” | |
| 987 | 2CO | 12 | 7 | v5s7 | 0 | General Information: | This verse reveals that Paul was speaking about himself beginning in [2 Corinthians 12:2](../12/02.md). | ||
| 988 | 2CO | 12 | 7 | xxi2 | τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων | 1 | because of the surpassing greatness of the revelations | Alternate translation: “because those revelations were so much greater than anything anyone else had ever seen” | |
| 989 | 2CO | 12 | 7 | hu8g | figs-activepassive | ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί | 1 | a thorn in the flesh was given to me | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave me a thorn in the flesh” or “God allowed me to have a thorn in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 990 | 2CO | 12 | 7 | q5e7 | figs-metaphor | σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί | 1 | a thorn in the flesh | Here Paul’s physical problems are compared to a **thorn** piercing his **flesh**. Alternate translation: “an affliction” or “a physical problem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 991 | 2CO | 12 | 7 | q7lz | ἄγγελος Σατανᾶ | 1 | a messenger from Satan | Alternate translation: “a servant of Satan” | |
| 992 | 2CO | 12 | 7 | ehp9 | μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι | 2 | overly proud | Alternate translation: “I would not become too proud” | |
| 993 | 2CO | 12 | 8 | n76p | τρὶς | 1 | Three times | Paul put the words **three times** at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that he had prayed many times about his “thorn” ([2 Corinthians 12:7](../12/07.md)). | |
| 994 | 2CO | 12 | 8 | wc7r | ὑπὲρ τούτου | 1 | Lord about this | Alternate translation: “about this thorn in the flesh,” or “about this affliction” | |
| 995 | 2CO | 12 | 9 | nr2j | ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου | 1 | My grace is enough for you | Alternate translation: “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need” | |
| 996 | 2CO | 12 | 9 | cs63 | ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται | 1 | for power is made perfect in weakness | Alternate translation: “for my power works best when you are weak” | |
| 997 | 2CO | 12 | 9 | g8mi | figs-metaphor | ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ | 1 | the power of Christ might reside on me | Paul speaks of the **power of Christ** as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ. (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 998 | 2CO | 12 | 10 | pxf1 | εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ | 1 | I am content for Christ’s sake in weaknesses, in insults, in troubles, in persecutions and distressing situations | This could mean: (1) Paul is **content** in **weaknesses**, **insults**, **troubles**, **persecutions**, and **distressing situations** if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ. | |
| 999 | 2CO | 12 | 10 | s5sx | ἐν ἀσθενείαις | 1 | in weaknesses | Alternate translation: “when I am weak” | |
| 1000 | 2CO | 12 | 10 | xl8q | ἐν ὕβρεσιν | 1 | in insults | Alternate translation: “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person” | |
| 1001 | 2CO | 12 | 10 | hza1 | ἐν ἀνάγκαις | 1 | in troubles | Alternate translation: “when I am suffering” | |
| 1002 | 2CO | 12 | 10 | c4t2 | στενοχωρίαις | 1 | distressing situations | Alternate translation: “when there is trouble” | |
| 1003 | 2CO | 12 | 10 | t7qg | ὅταν γὰρ ἀσθενῶ, τότε δυνατός εἰμι | 1 | For whenever I am weak, then I am strong | Paul is saying that when he is no longer **strong** enough to do what needs to be done, Christ, who is more powerful than Paul could ever be, will work through Paul to do what needs to be done. However, it would be best to translate these words literally, if your language allows. | |
| 1004 | 2CO | 12 | 11 | a1ym | γέγονα ἄφρων | 1 | I have become a fool | Alternate translation: “I am acting like a fool” | |
| 1005 | 2CO | 12 | 11 | pzw1 | ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε | 1 | You forced me to this | Alternate translation: “You forced me to talk this way” | |
| 1006 | 2CO | 12 | 11 | v2lr | figs-activepassive | ἐγὼ…ὤφειλον ὑφ’ ὑμῶν συνίστασθαι | 1 | I should have been commended by you | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you should have praised me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 1007 | 2CO | 12 | 11 | f644 | συνίστασθαι | 1 | commended | See how you translated similar phrases in ([3:1](../03/01.md)) and ([4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “been praised” or “been recommended” | |
| 1008 | 2CO | 12 | 11 | h4d5 | figs-litotes | οὐδὲν γὰρ ὑστέρησα | 1 | For I was not at all inferior | By using the negative form, Paul is saying strongly that those Corinthians who think that he is **inferior** are wrong. Alternate translation: “For I am just as good as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) |
| 1009 | 2CO | 12 | 11 | s82x | figs-irony | τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων | 1 | super-apostles | Paul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say they are. See how this is translated in [2 Corinthians 11:5](../11/05.md). Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) |
| 1010 | 2CO | 12 | 12 | kp5l | figs-activepassive | τὰ μὲν σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη | 1 | indeed the signs of an apostle were performed | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form with emphasis on the **signs**, or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is the true signs of an apostle that I performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 1011 | 2CO | 12 | 12 | d4um | σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν | 1 | signs and wonders and mighty deeds | These are the “signs of an apostle” that Paul performed “with all perseverance.” | |
| 1012 | 2CO | 12 | 13 | z35e | figs-rquestion | τί γάρ ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν? | 1 | how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that … you? | Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians are wrong to accuse him of wanting to do them harm. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I treated you the same way I treated all the other churches, except that I myself did not burden you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 1013 | 2CO | 12 | 13 | d426 | αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν | 1 | I was not a burden to you | Alternate translation: “I did not ask you for money or other things I needed” | |
| 1014 | 2CO | 12 | 13 | sy7v | figs-irony | χαρίσασθέ μοι τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην! | 1 | Forgive me for this wrong! | Paul is being ironic to shame the Corinthians. Both he and they know that he has done them no wrong, but they have been treating him as though he has wronged them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) |
| 1015 | 2CO | 12 | 13 | u1w9 | τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην | 1 | this wrong | Here, **this wrong** refers to not asking them for money and other things he needed. | |
| 1016 | 2CO | 12 | 14 | ugk1 | figs-explicit | ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς | 1 | but you | The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “but what I want is that you love and accept me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) |
| 1017 | 2CO | 12 | 14 | wd97 | οὐ…ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν | 3 | children should not save up for the parents | Young **children** are not responsible for saving money or other goods to give to their healthy **parents**. | |
| 1018 | 2CO | 12 | 15 | vj2m | figs-metaphor | ἐγὼ…ἥδιστα δαπανήσω καὶ ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι | 1 | I will most gladly spend and be spent | Paul speaks of his work and his physical life as if it were money that he or God could **spend**. Alternate translation: “I will gladly do any work and gladly allow God to permit people to kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 1019 | 2CO | 12 | 15 | nk8v | figs-metonymy | ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν | 1 | for your souls | The word **souls** is a metonym for the people themselves. Alternate translation: “for you” or “so you will live well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) |
| 1020 | 2CO | 12 | 15 | t3na | figs-rquestion | εἰ περισσοτέρως ὑμᾶς ἀγαπῶν, ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι? | 1 | If I love you more, am I to be loved less? | This rhetorical question to emphasize that the Corinthians should love Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I love you so much, you should not love me so little.” or “If I love you so much, you should love me more than you do.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 1021 | 2CO | 12 | 15 | j887 | περισσοτέρως | 1 | more | It is not clear what it is that Paul’s love is **more** than. It is probably best to use “very much” or a “so much” that can be compared to “so little” later in the sentence. | |
| 1022 | 2CO | 12 | 16 | ur5x | figs-irony | ἀλλὰ ὑπάρχων πανοῦργος δόλῳ, ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον | 1 | But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit | Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians who think he lied to them even if he did not ask them for money. Alternate translation: “but others think I was deceptive and used trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) |
| 1023 | 2CO | 12 | 17 | vb7q | figs-rquestion | μή τινα ὧν ἀπέσταλκα πρὸς ὑμᾶς, δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐπλεονέκτησα ὑμᾶς? | 1 | I did not take advantage of you by any of those whom I sent to you, did I? | Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one that I sent to you has taken advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 1024 | 2CO | 12 | 18 | pjl2 | figs-rquestion | μήτι ἐπλεονέκτησεν ὑμᾶς Τίτος? | 1 | Titus did not take advantage of you, did he? | Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Titus certainly did not take advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 1025 | 2CO | 12 | 18 | acg6 | figs-metaphor | οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν | 1 | Did we not walk in the same way? | Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same spirit.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 1026 | 2CO | 12 | 18 | rjiy | figs-rquestion | οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν | 1 | Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all have the same attitude and live alike.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) | |
| 1027 | 2CO | 12 | 18 | k6b3 | figs-rquestion | οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? | 1 | Did we not walk in the same steps? | Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same steps.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 1028 | 2CO | 12 | 18 | oket | figs-metaphor | οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? | 1 | Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all do things the same way.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) | |
| 1029 | 2CO | 12 | 19 | g1iw | figs-rquestion | πάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα? | 1 | Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you? | Paul uses this question to acknowledge something that the people may have been thinking. He does this so that he can assure them that it is not true. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Perhaps you think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) |
| 1030 | 2CO | 12 | 19 | ih3e | figs-metaphor | κατέναντι Θεοῦ | 1 | Before God | Paul speaks of **God** knowing everything Paul does as if God were physically present and observed everything Paul said and did. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “In the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 1031 | 2CO | 12 | 19 | vg3u | figs-metaphor | ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς | 1 | for your strengthening | Paul speaks of knowing how to obey God and desiring to obey him as if it were physical growth. Alternate translation: “so that you would know God and obey him better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 1032 | 2CO | 12 | 20 | cu6s | οὐχ οἵους θέλω, εὕρω ὑμᾶς | 1 | I may not find you as I wish | Alternate translation: “I may not like what I find” or “I may not like what I see you doing” | |
| 1033 | 2CO | 12 | 20 | zy6g | κἀγὼ εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν οἷον οὐ θέλετε | 1 | I may not be found by you as you wish | Alternate translation: “you might not like what you see in me” | |
| 1034 | 2CO | 12 | 20 | rh1h | figs-abstractnouns | μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι | 1 | there may be quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder | If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. This could mean: (1) some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 1035 | 2CO | 12 | 21 | ddw3 | πενθήσω πολλοὺς τῶν προημαρτηκότων, | 1 | I might be grieved by many of those who have sinned | Alternate translation: “I will be grieved because many of them have not given up their old sins” | |
| 1036 | 2CO | 12 | 21 | hq1e | figs-parallelism | μὴ μετανοησάντων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ | 1 | did not repent of the impurity and sexual immorality and lustful indulgence | This could mean: (1) Paul is saying almost the same thing three times for emphasis. Alternate translation: “did not stop commiting the sexual sins that they practiced” (2) Paul is speaking of three different sins. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) |
| 1037 | 2CO | 12 | 21 | rh22 | figs-abstractnouns | ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ | 1 | of the impurity | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **impurity**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 1038 | 2CO | 12 | 21 | rn6u | figs-abstractnouns | πορνείᾳ | 1 | of the … sexual immorality | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **sexual immorality**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of doing sexually immoral deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 1039 | 2CO | 12 | 21 | yyr5 | figs-abstractnouns | ἀσελγείᾳ | 1 | of the … lustful indulgence | If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **lustful indulgence**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) |
| 1040 | 2CO | 13 | intro | abcg | 0 | # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Preparation<br><br>Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.<br><br>### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”<br><br>Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) | |||
| 1041 | 2CO | 13 | 1 | slj1 | figs-activepassive | ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα | 1 | Every matter must be established by the evidence of two or three witnesses | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Believe that someone has done something wrong only after two or three people have said the same thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 1042 | 2CO | 13 | 2 | fxl6 | τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν | 1 | all the rest | Alternate translation: “all you other people” | |
| 1043 | 2CO | 13 | 4 | a1bf | figs-activepassive | καὶ…ἐσταυρώθη | 1 | he was crucified | If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) |
| 1044 | 2CO | 13 | 5 | sbx4 | ἐν ὑμῖν | 1 | in you | Here, **in you** could mean: (1) Jesus is living inside each individual. (2) Jesus is living among them, part of and the most important member of the group. | |
| 1045 | 2CO | 13 | 7 | u75e | figs-doublenegatives | μὴ ποιῆσαι ὑμᾶς κακὸν μηδέν | 1 | that you may not do any wrong | If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … wrong**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you will do everything right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) |
| 1046 | 2CO | 13 | 7 | gt2e | δόκιμοι | 1 | to have passed the test | Alternate translation: “to be great teachers and live the truth” | |
| 1047 | 2CO | 13 | 8 | a3l7 | οὐ…δυνάμεθά τι κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας | 1 | we are not able to do anything against the truth | Alternate translation: “we are not able to keep people from learning the truth” | |
| 1048 | 2CO | 13 | 9 | vt7b | τὴν ὑμῶν κατάρτισιν | 1 | for your perfection | Alternate translation: “that you may become spiritually mature” | |
| 1049 | 2CO | 13 | 10 | rlm8 | figs-metaphor | εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν. | 1 | for building up, and not for tearing down | Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2 Corinthians 10:8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) |
| 1050 | 2CO | 13 | 11 | uk1p | 0 | Connecting Statement: | Paul closes his letter to the Corinthian believers. | ||
| 1051 | 2CO | 13 | 11 | fm8m | καταρτίζεσθε | 1 | Be restored | Alternate translation: “Work toward maturity” | |
| 1052 | 2CO | 13 | 11 | diw1 | τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖτε | 1 | be of the same mind | Alternate translation: “live in harmony with one another” | |
| 1053 | 2CO | 13 | 12 | p1nh | ἐν ἁγίῳ φιλήματι | 1 | with a holy kiss | Alternate translation: “with Christian love” | |
| 1054 | 2CO | 13 | 12 | x2qd | οἱ ἅγιοι | 1 | the saints | Alternate translation: “those whom God has set apart for himself” |